JP2024020608A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming. SOLUTION: When a game ball enters a second operation port, second reservation information is acquired. Then, when the second pending information is subject to execution of the validity determination process, a jackpot result may be selected, and a small win result may be selected. In the case of a jackpot result or a small win result, the opening/closing control of the special electric winning device is executed, and when the game ball enters the special electric winning device, the payout of the game ball is executed. In this case, a through gate is provided on the downstream side of the special electric winning device, and when the special electric winning device is opened and closed while the game ball is on the opening/closing member, the game ball enters the through gate. It becomes possible. When a game ball enters the through gate, the reservation information on the regular game side is acquired, and the second operating port is opened in response to the reservation information on the regular game side. Further, even when a game ball enters the sudden gate, the reservation information on the regular game side is acquired. [Selection diagram] Figure 7

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which they enter a special control state when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, resulting in a winning result in an internal lottery, and A configuration is known in which a special control state is entered based on the arrival of a game ball into a game ball. When the state shifts to the special control state, for example, the opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the gaming area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device (for example, (See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-009055

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 is provided in a game area where game balls flow downward, and a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a first state in which a game ball can enter the game ball easily. a variable ball entry means that is switchable between a second state in which the game ball is not allowed to enter and a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter;
special control means that executes special control to bring the variable ball entry means into the second state after putting it in the first state;
transition means for transitioning a gaming state to a special control state in which the special control is executed;
special ball entry means that restricts entry of game balls in a predetermined gaming state and allows entry of game balls in a gaming state other than the predetermined gaming state;
acquisition compatible ball entry means that enables entry of game balls at least in the predetermined gaming state;
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry means, the state in which the game ball can be entered becomes possible, and based on the game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means, the state in which the game ball can be entered is activated. a timing means for entering the ball into a state in which the ball is allowed to enter;
Equipped with
The present invention is characterized in that the transition to the special control state is triggered based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display surface of a pattern display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game area. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability validity table for the first special symbol, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high probability validity table for the first special symbol, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high probability validity table for the first special symbol. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability correctness table for the 2nd special figure, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability correctness table for the 2nd special figure. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the 1st special figure, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the 2nd special figure. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which a detection result of a ball entry detection sensor is input to a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a payout control device and various devices that communicate with the payout control device. It is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU. FIG. 2 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory; 3 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. It is a front view of the game board showing an enlarged view of the area where the special electric winning device is provided. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the opening/closing member. (a), (b) It is a perspective view of a passage formation body and an opening-and-closing member which shows how the entrance part of a 4th discharge passage part is opened and closed by an opening-and-closing member. It is a top view of the opening/closing member and the drive part for special electricity. (a), (b) are sectional views taken along the line AA in FIG. 29; (a) to (e) are time charts showing how winnings to the second operating port occur in the opening/closing execution mode. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode. (a1) to (b3) are time charts for explaining the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed in response to a small winning result. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows special call start processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special electricity release performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special electric train closure performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special call termination process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F in a second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the recognition process performed by main side CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management CPU. 5A to 5H are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and signal types is stored in the correspondence memory; FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in a third embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage information storage process executed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by a management CPU in the fourth embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process performed by the main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process performed by the management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the trigger identification process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU in the eighth embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of memory for history in a 9th embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of an MPU of a main control device in a tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 7 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main control device in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management side I/F. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory. 3 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management CPU. 3 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU. It is a block diagram for explaining the structure of the signal path which transmits the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in a 12th embodiment. (a1) to (c2) are time charts for explaining the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special call start processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special electricity release performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special electric train closure performed by main side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in a 14th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry detection process performed by main side CPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how a game ball enters the first special ball entrance or the second special ball entrance in the opening/closing execution mode. It is a front view of the game board in a 15th embodiment. (a), (b) are sectional views taken along the line AA in FIG. 78; (a) A sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 78, and (b) a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 78. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability validity table for the first special symbol, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high probability validity table for the first special symbol, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high probability validity table for the first special symbol. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability correctness table for the 2nd special figure, and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability correctness table for the 2nd special figure. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the release setting process for special electricity performed by main side CPU. It is a front view of the game board in a 16th embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the opening setting process for special electric power which is executed by the main side CPU, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the closing setting process for special electric power which is executed by the main side CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how the first special electric winning device and the second special electric winning device are opened and closed. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the game board for explaining the structure of the special electric prize winning device in the 17th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow prevention control process performed by main side CPU. (a) to (d) are time charts for explaining the relationship between the opening/closing state of each special electric winning device and the operating position of the flow prevention member. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric winning device and the operating position of the flow prevention member. It is a front view of the game board in the 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the reservation information on the general figure side performed by the main side CPU. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content of a pattern display device. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how reservation information on the general map side is acquired. It is a front view of the game board in a 19th embodiment. (a), (b) are sectional views taken along the line AA in FIG. 95;

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. have The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning holes 31 are provided, and one each is provided for the others.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, if one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball enters the second operating port 34, In this case, when one game ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten prize balls are paid out and sent to the special electric winning device 32. When one game ball enters the ball, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The variable display unit 36 includes a symbol display device 41 having a rectangular display surface, and a center frame 36a surrounding the periphery of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. In the center frame 36a, a portion along the upper side, left side, and right side of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 protrudes forward from the board surface of the game board 24, and the variable display unit 36 is located in the center of the game area PA. It is provided. As a result, the gaming area PA includes an upper area PA1 located above the variable display unit 36, a left area PA2 located to the left of the variable display unit 36, and a right area PA3 located to the right of the variable display unit 36. , and a lower area PA4 located below the variable display unit 36. In other words, the game ball launched into the game area PA will first reach the upper area PA1, but the game ball that has reached the upper area PA1 will go in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. The game ball flows down or flows down in the order of upper area PA1 → right side area PA3 → lower side area PA4, and a game ball flowing down one of left side area PA2 and right side area PA3 does not flow down the other.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in a lower area PA4 that is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA. The lower area PA4 is downstream and continuous with the left area PA2, which is the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA, and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA. It is continuous with the right side area PA3 and downstream thereof. Therefore, even if the game ball flows down from any position in the upper area PA1, which is the area above the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA, it can reach the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. . For example, even if the rotation operation of the firing operation device 28 is performed to reach the maximum operation amount, the game ball may reach the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34. In addition, when a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the first operating port 33, not only a winning in the first operating port 33 may occur, but also a winning in the second operating port 34 may occur. When a firing operation is performed with the aim of winning a prize in the second operating port 34, not only a winning in the second operating port 34 may occur, but also a winning in the first operating port 33 may occur.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device, with the first operating port 33 facing upward and the second operating port 34 facing downward. There is. The first operating port 33 is not provided with a member for differentiating the frequency of entry of game balls into the first operating port 33, and when comparing the left side area PA2 in a predetermined manner in which game balls flow down. The probability of the game ball entering the first operating port 33 in is the same regardless of the game state. Therefore, the player can perform a firing operation aimed at causing the game ball to enter the first operating port 33 in any situation.

A stage portion 36c is provided in a lower frame portion 36b, which is a portion of the center frame 36a below the display surface of the symbol display device 41, so as to extend in the lateral direction above the first operating port 33. In the left frame portion 36d, which is the portion to the left of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, there is a warp passageway that allows game balls flowing down the area to the left of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36c. An entrance portion 36e is formed. The center portion of the stage portion 36c in the lateral direction is located vertically above the first operating port 33, and the center portion has a lead-out portion 36f for guiding the game ball by its own weight to the lower part of the stage portion 36c. is formed. In this case, game balls guided to the stage part 36c and guided downward from the stage part 36c from areas other than the lead-out part 36f are difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the game balls guided to the lead-out part 36f The game ball led out from below the stage part 36c enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball, more specifically in the right side area PA3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b. In the first special figure display section 37a, a winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first actuating port 33 as a trigger, and thus a variable display of symbols is carried out. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display section 37b, a winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the second actuating port 34 as a trigger, and thereby a variable display of symbols is carried out. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. Note that the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b are constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but they are not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed on the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls entered into the first actuation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. You can.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of symbols is performed on the first special symbol display section 37a based on a winning at the first operating port 33, a variable display of symbols is performed in accordance with this, and a variable display of the symbols is performed in accordance with this. When the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display section 37b based on the prize winning number 34, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that is entered after winning is performed. be exposed.

Display contents when symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in Figures 4(a) to (j), the pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine main patterns each numbered from ``1'' to ``9'' and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the display screen is designed so that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 5(a), five effective lines are set on the display surface, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display screen based on winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are scrolled periodically in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined symbols statically displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the fluctuating display of symbols ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 16R high probability result, which will be described later, a combination of "7" symbols will be formed on any active line, and the result of the internal lottery will be In the case of any of the following 2R high accuracy results, 4R high accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, and 10R high accuracy results, there is a combination of the same odd symbols other than the "7" symbol on any active line. If the result of the internal lottery is any of the 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result, or 16R low probability result described later, it will be on any valid line. If a combination of the same even numbered symbols is formed and the result of the internal lottery is any of the 1st small winning result, 2nd small winning result, and 3rd small winning result described below, it will be on any active line. A predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1") that is not a combination of the same symbols and a combination of reach symbols is formed.

In addition, based on the winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, the display starts on either of the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 until the display ends after displaying a predetermined result. corresponds to one game round. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

If a jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the prize entered into the first operating port 33, the system shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible. Further, even if a jackpot or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on a prize entered into the second operation port 34, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the right side area PA3 in the gaming area PA. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left area PA2 cannot enter the special electric winning device 32. For example, when the firing operation device 28 is rotated to reach the maximum operation amount, When a firing operation is performed so that a game ball flows down PA3, a prize can be won in the special electric prize winning device 32. The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 will be explained in detail later.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flown down the game area PA.

As already explained, the game ball that enters any of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34, and out port 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and flowing into the game area PA is either the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, or the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the ball will be ejected from the gaming area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 flow down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they have flowed, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 42 to 48 is provided with various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be explained below. As described above, there are four general winning openings 31, so there are discharge passages 42 to 44 corresponding to each of the four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a, 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 42, and the detection range exists in the middle of the second discharge passage part 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage section 42, and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side The ball is detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage section 43. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 44 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 44. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage section 44.

A fourth discharge passage section 45 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 45, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is on the way to pass through the fourth discharge passage part 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operating port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage section 46, and the game ball that enters the first operating port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage section 46. While passing, it is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. While passing, it is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is provided corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 48, and the game ball that enters the out-port 24a is on the way to pass through the seventh discharge passage section 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

Note that a game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. Further, a gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are electrically connected to a main control device 60, which will be described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42a to 49a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out by a payout device 76 to be described later, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. Note that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint that connects the plurality of case bodies that make up the board box 60a inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesive target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 60a can be considered.

A back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with, for example, a main power source of 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 78 is provided to control the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to maintain memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The main side ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main side CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The main side RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the main side ROM 64. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA based on information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although the details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, and In accordance with the grasped ball entry history, the frequency of balls entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is grasped.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 67, and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 67.

Various sensors such as various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As already explained, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a include the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operating opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating port detection sensor 47a, an out port detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether the ball enters each ball entry section. Further, the main side CPU 63 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings in the first operating port 33 and various lottery drawings based on winnings in the second operating port 34.

A power outage monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball corresponding entering part of the above-mentioned ball entering part where the occurrence of the ball entering corresponds to the payout of the game ball. Ru. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 81.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there is a drive unit 32b for special electricity that opens and closes an opening/closing member 202 (described later) of the special electricity winning device 32, and a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes a general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. , a special figure unit 37 and a regular figure unit 38 are connected. By the way, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a, a second special figure display section 37b, a first special figure reservation display section 37c, and a second special figure reservation display section 37d. are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the main side CPU 63 so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electricity access state of the general electricity accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the drive unit 34b for general electricity is executed in the main side CPU 63 so that the general electricity accessory 34a is opened and closed. . Furthermore, in each game round, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed by the main CPU 63. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general utility object 34a, the main side CPU 63 executes display control of the general public figure display section 38a. In addition, when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, or when variable display starts in the special pattern display sections 37a and 37b, the main side CPU 63 controls the special pattern pending display section 37c, When the display control of 37d is executed and a winning occurs in the through gate 35, or when the fluctuating display is started on the ordinary symbol display section 38a, the display control of the ordinary symbol pending display section 38b is executed in the main CPU 63. be done.

The power outage monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The power source/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 of the control device 60 and the payout control device 77. Further, the power supply/launch control device 78 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and also controls the display control device 82. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main CPU 63>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main CPU 63 will be described using FIG. 8.

During the game, the main CPU 63 uses various types of counter information to perform jackpot lottery, display settings on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b, symbol display settings on the symbol display device 41, display settings on the regular symbol display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the winning random number counter C1 used in the lottery of winning occurrences, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when the winning random number counter C1 changes, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation display on the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41. A variation type counter CS that determines the period is used. Furthermore, a general electricity random number counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be placed in the general electricity open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as an acquisition information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. are stored in the special figure holding area 65a. The special figure holding area 65a includes a first special figure holding area 85, a second special figure holding area 86, and a special figure execution area 87.

The first special drawing holding area 85 includes a first area 85a, a second area 85b, a third area 85c, and a fourth area 85d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 85a to 85d as pending information on the special drawing side. In this case, in the first area 85a to the fourth area 85d, if winnings to the first operating port 33 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 85a → second area 85b → third area 85c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 85d. By providing the four areas 85a to 85d in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the first special figure holding area 85 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure holding area 86 includes a first area 86a, a second area 86b, a third area 86c, and a fourth area 86d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 86a to 86d as pending information on the special drawing side. In this case, in the first area 86a to the fourth area 86d, if winnings to the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 86a → second area 86b → third area 86c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 86d. By providing the four areas 86a to 86d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. The number that can be held and stored in the second special figure holding area 86 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The special figure execution area 87 stores pending information on objects for which special figure validity judgment, distribution judgment, etc. are to be performed when starting variable display on either of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b. area. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a, the pending information stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure holding area 85 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. be done. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display section 37b, the reservation information stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure reservation area 86 is moved to the special figure execution area 87.

The information corresponding to the general random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 65c when a winning in the through gate 35 occurs. The general drawing reservation area 65c includes a first area 88a, a second area 88b, a third area 88c, and a fourth area 88d, and the numerical information of the general drawing random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the winning history in the through gate 35. is stored in one of the areas 88a to 88d as pending information on the general figure side. In this case, in the first area 88a to fourth area 88d, if winnings to the through gate 35 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 88a → second area 88b → third area 88c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of 88d. By providing the four areas 88a to 88d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the through gate 35 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the general drawing holding area 65c is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more; It may be. The ordinary figure holding area 65c is provided with an execution area 89 for ordinary figures. The execution area 89 for general purpose maps is an area in which pending information on objects to be subjected to the general power open lottery process is stored when variable display is started on the general purpose map display section 38a. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the ordinary figure display section 38a, the reservation information stored in the first area 88a of the ordinary figure holding area 65c is moved to the execution area 89 for ordinary figures.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the standard random number counter C4 will be explained. The general random number counter C4 is configured such that, for example, the increment is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The standard random number counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the standard card holding area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

This pachinko machine 10 has only one type of support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning the general electricity open state in the general electricity release lottery process using the general electricity random number counter C4 and the manner of determining the variable display period when the variable display of the symbol is executed on the general electricity illustration display section 38a are as follows. It is constant regardless of the game state, and the number of times the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in the general electric power open state, the one open period of the general electric accessory 34a, and the general electric accessory 34a in the general electric power open state. In the case where an open state occurs multiple times, the execution mode of the drive control of the general electric utility object 34a, such as the closed period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state, is also constant regardless of the game state. It is. As a result, there is no need to change the display control mode of the general figure display section 38a and the drive control mode of the general electric utility object 34a depending on the type of support mode, so the program capacity for executing these controls is reduced. And it becomes possible to suppress data capacity. Note that since there is only one type of support mode, the normal gaming state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in this embodiment is a gaming state in which the win/fail lottery mode is a high probability mode. It is a gaming state which is a mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, a judgment is made using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that becomes the winning result in the determination of success or failure is stored in the main side ROM 64 as a success or failure table. In the win/fail table, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the win/fail results. The jackpot result is a win/fail result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, and can trigger a transition to a win/fail lottery mode. The small win result is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, but does not trigger a transition to a win/fail lottery mode. A lose result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode.

The opening/closing execution mode that is executed when a jackpot result is achieved is a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. The round game continues until either one of the following conditions is met: the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed reaches the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 32. It's about games. In this embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the opening duration period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 is set to 10. In a situation where the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that the round game cannot be played. The opening duration period is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of winnings in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it can be expected that more game balls than the upper limit number of winnings will be won in the special electric winning device 32. Further, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result.

In the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when the result is a small hit, the round game is not set, the number of openings and closings of the special electric winning device 32 is the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls is This is an opening/closing number regulation mode that ends when one of the conditions for winning the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. A plurality of types of opening continuation periods in one opening of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing number regulation mode are set. All of these open duration periods are set longer than the firing cycle of game balls (specifically 0.6 seconds), but the firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit number of winnings (specifically 10 pieces) are different from each other. There is a period in which the number is less than the product, and a period in which the number is greater than or equal to the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of winnings (specifically, 10 balls). In the opening/closing execution mode executed when a small winning result is obtained, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player, although the number is smaller than in the opening/closing execution mode executed when a jackpot result is obtained.

As shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 9(a) to 9(d), the win/fail table contains the first reservation information stored in the first special symbol reservation area 85 based on winnings to the first operating port 33. A first special figure winning/failure table used for the winning/failure judgment, and a second holding information table used for the correctness/failure judgment of the second reserved information stored in the second special drawing holding area 86 based on winnings to the second operating port 34. A validity table for special figures is set. In addition, the first special pattern winning/failure table includes a low probability winning/failure table and a high probability winning/failure table, and similarly, the winning/failure table for the second special pattern includes a low probability winning/failure table and a high probability winning/failure table. There is a validity table. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, different success/failure tables are referred to for the first hold information and the second hold information, and in either case, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are used as the win/fail lottery mode in the judgment of judgment. Existing.

To explain each win/fail table in detail, the low probability win/fail table for the first special symbol has two random number values (for example, "5", "305", and "305"), as shown in FIG. ”), and the other values are random numbers that result in an outlier. In other words, when the first pending information is determined in the low probability lottery mode, the winning result will not be a small winning result, although it may be either a jackpot result or a losing result.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), the high probability success/failure table for the first special figure has a larger number of random number values that result in a jackpot than the low probability success/failure table for the first special figure. Specifically, the number is 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305"). ", "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in a low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in a high probability mode. Other random number values are random number values that are outliers. In other words, when the first pending information is judged in the high probability lottery mode, the winning result will be either a jackpot result or a losing result, but it will not be a small winning result.

In the low probability success/failure table for the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9(c), the value of the random number that results in a jackpot is the same as in the low probability success/failure table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, the values of random numbers other than the random numbers that result in a jackpot are the values of random numbers that result in a small win. That is, when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the win/fail determination process is performed on the second pending information, either a jackpot result or a small win result will be obtained. Moreover, a first small winning result, a second small winning result, and a third small winning result are set as small winning results. The first small winning result, the second small winning result, and the third small winning result are different in the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described in detail later. Furthermore, the winning probabilities for these first to third small winning results are all the same at 199/600.

As shown in FIG. 9(d), the high probability success/failure table for the second special symbol has the same random number value as the high probability success/failure table for the first special symbol. Therefore, the number of random number values that result in the jackpot is larger than in the case of the low probability probability table for the second special symbol. On the other hand, the values of random numbers other than the random numbers that result in a jackpot are the values of random numbers that result in a small win. In other words, when the second pending information is judged in the high probability lottery mode, either the jackpot result or the small win result will be obtained. Similar to the low probability correctness table for the second special figure, the first small winning result, the second small winning result, and the third small winning result are set as the small winning result. The winning probabilities for these first to third small winning results are approximately the same, 193/600 or 194/600.

As described above, by configuring a structure in which a small winning result can occur when the second pending information becomes a trigger for a judgment of validity, the small winning result can be handled by the occurrence of a winning at the second operating port 34. The opening/closing execution mode is more likely to occur. Then, by generating the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the small winning result, the player can slightly increase the number of balls he has.

In addition, if the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in the winning mentioned above can be arbitrary, and in the situation where the low probability mode is used, it is not possible to get a jackpot result. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may be partially included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot in a high probability mode, or may not be included. .

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the special figure holding area 65a at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are set by setting differences in two conditions: the number of times the round game is executed in the open/close execution mode, and the win/fail lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the open/close execution mode ends. There is.

As shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the distribution table includes 2R low-probability results, 2R high-probability results, 4R low-probability results, and 4R A high-accuracy result, a 6R low-accuracy result, a 6R high-accuracy result, a 10R low-accuracy result, a 10R high-accuracy result, a 16R low-accuracy result, and a 16R high-accuracy result are set.

For 2R low certainty result and 2R high certainty result, the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 2, and for the 4R low certainty result and 4R high certainty result, the number of executions of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode is 4, and 6R low. For certain results and 6R high certain results, the number of times the round game is executed in the open/close execution mode is 6 times, and for the 10R low certain result and 10R high certain result, the number of times the round game is executed in the open/close execution mode is 10 times, and for the 16R low certain result. And 16R high accuracy result means that the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode is 16. In addition, for 2R low-probability results, 4R low-probability results, 6R low-probability results, 10R low-probability results, and 16R low-probability results, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and the winning/failure lottery mode before transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. In either case, it becomes a low probability mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, for 2R high-accuracy results, 4R high-accuracy results, 6R high-accuracy results, 10R high-accuracy results, and 16R high-accuracy results, the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the winning lottery mode before switching to the opening/closing execution mode. In either case, it becomes a high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the distribution table includes a first special feature that is used when determining the distribution of the first reservation information obtained based on winnings to the first operating port 33. A distribution table for the drawings and a distribution table for the second special symbol used when determining the distribution of the second reservation information acquired based on winnings in the second operating port 34 are set.

To explain each distribution table in detail, as shown in Figure 10(a), the distribution table for the first special symbol has two types of jackpot results to be distributed: 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result. As a result, 4R low-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R low-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result, 10R low-accuracy result, 10R high-accuracy result, 16R low-accuracy result, and 16R high-accuracy result are set. In the distribution table for the first special drawing, "0 to 1" corresponds to 2R low probability results, "2 to 5" corresponds to 2R high probability results, and "6 to 7" corresponds to 4R results. "8-11" corresponds to 4R high-reliability results, "12-13" corresponds to 6R low-reliability results, and "14-17" corresponds to 6R high-reliability results. "18-19" corresponds to 10R low-probability results, "20-23" corresponds to 10R high-probability results, and "24-25" corresponds to 16R low-probability results. "26-29" corresponds to 16R high accuracy results. In this case, the probabilities of 2R low-probability results, 4R low-probability results, 6R low-probability results, 10R low-probability results, and 16R low-probability results are about 6.7%, respectively; The probabilities of a 6R highly accurate result, a 10R highly accurate result, and a 16R highly accurate result are each about 13%. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10(b), 16R low probability results and 16R high probability results are set as the types of jackpot results to be distributed. In the distribution table for the second special drawing, "0 to 9" correspond to 16R low probability results, and "10 to 29" correspond to 16R high probability results. In this case, the probability of a 16R low-probability result is approximately 33%, and this probability is determined by the 2R low-probability result, 4R low-probability result, 6R low-probability result, 10R low-probability result and The probability that any one of the 16R low-probability results will be selected is the same. In addition, the probability of a 16R high-accuracy result is approximately 67%, and this probability is determined by the 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result, 10R high-accuracy result, and 16R high-accuracy result in the distribution table for the first special symbol. The probability of selecting one of the highly probable results is the same.

The distribution table for the first special symbol and the distribution table for the second special symbol have the same probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a jackpot win. On the other hand, the average number of executions of the round game is greater in the distribution table for the second special symbol than in the distribution table for the first special symbol. Therefore, the type of jackpot result that can be selected in the case of a jackpot win is that the winning occurs at the second operating port 34 rather than the case where a winning occurs at the first operating port 33 and an internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if an internal lottery is conducted.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that is capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. This refers to a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result after the start of fluctuating display of symbols and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making the user expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a grant response result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the reach-to-reach display, the combination of reach-to-reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbols are displayed. Includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a row. In addition, with the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after displaying or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols in a reduced size.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows after the variable display of the symbols has started on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, or in a situation in which symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows, or in some symbol rows where multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol column, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column. It also includes a case in which the background screen is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and a case in which the symbols on the symbol row are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a preview display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game round corresponding to the small winning result, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, this is executed when the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main side ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display a preview is not made by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 recognizes that a preview display is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result, and that a preview display with a low appearance rate is A lottery process for displaying a preview is executed so as to satisfy at least one condition that the occurrence is likely to occur. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main CPU 63 to determine the variable display period in the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and the variable display period of symbols in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is repeatedly updated and acquired when determining a variation pattern at the start of variation display in the special symbol display sections 37a, 37b and at the start of symbol variation by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main side RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main side CPU 63 are set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and it is further determined whether the power failure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Determination is made (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined ( Step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65, such as initialization of a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. Further, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for making the management IC 66 recognize various information, and a data output process for outputting various data to the reading device connected to the MPU 62 are performed. Processing is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be explained later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when main processing is started. This state in which generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at a timing when the process in step S111 is completed and before the process in step S112 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S111 is completed and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S112 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 will not start the process for advancing the game until the situation is reached.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process from step S112 to step S115 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S113, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S114, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 65, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. After executing the process in step S115, the process returns to step S112 and repeats the processes in steps S112 to S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, a power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power outage is received from the power outage monitoring board 67, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, an infinite loop is executed after executing power outage processing. Become. In the power outage processing, the power outage flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

After that, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4, and performing a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Execute processing to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S113, and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S114.

Thereafter, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes from step S207 onwards are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

Thereafter, reading processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Thereafter, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, the signals received from each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the output port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, and first operating port 33 are activated. , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is determined. Note that the details of the ball entry detection process will be explained later.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

Thereafter, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 seconds. In the subsequent step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is confirmed, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed. I do.

Thereafter, a special figure/special electric line control process for controlling the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S213), and the display control of the ordinary figure display section 38a and the drive control of the ordinary electric accessory 34a are executed. A general-purpose electric power control process for the purpose of the control is executed (step S214). The processing contents of the special figure special electric line control process and the ordinary figure general electric line control process will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is output for reflecting the increase or decrease in the number of pending information related to the special figure display sections 37a and 37b on the special figure pending display sections 37c and 37d. At the same time as setting, output information for reflecting the increase/decrease in the number of pending information related to the common figure display section 38a on the common figure pending display section 38b is also set. Further, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information for updating the display contents of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b is set, and the display of the general figure display section 38a is set. Configure the output information to update the contents.

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S216). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process is executed to output information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 (step S219). Details of the management output process will be explained later.

<Ball entry detection processing>
Next, in the main side CPU 63, based on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for identifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are input to the main CPU 63.

The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. Areas in which information of "0" or "1" is stored in accordance with the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7. In addition, more than eight types of signals will be input to the input port 63a, but in order to limit the number of signals input at the same time to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is determined by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In a situation where such settings are made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the 1st bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the exit detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

When each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a does not detect the passage of a game ball, it outputs a LOW level signal indicating that it is not being detected as a detection signal, thereby detecting the passage of a game ball. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when receiving a LOW level signal, and stores "1" for the corresponding bit when receiving a HI level signal. Stores information about. In other words, in a situation where the passage of a game ball is not detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a, information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating that the ball is not detected is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passage of the game ball is not detected. In a situation where detection is being performed, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the 0th bit D0 stores the information "0" to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The 10 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 10 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 award balls counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which the information of "0" is stored to the state in which the information of "1" is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). . The second output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). . The third output flag is used to specify by the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and The value of the 15 award balls counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special electric winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric line control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that "1" is set in the special electric prize winning flag, it is possible to input one game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32. It is specified that a ball has occurred, and the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric winning device 32 in the round game or opening/closing execution mode is subtracted by 1. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 15 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 15 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 15 prize balls are outputted. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that "1" is set in the first operation winning flag, the reservation area RE of the special figure holding area 65a is A process for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of stored pending information is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The fifth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. If the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and one prize ball is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state where the information "0" is stored to the state where the information "1" is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Furthermore, the value of the one prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), by confirming that "1" is set in the second operation winning flag, the reservation area RE of the special figure holding area 65a is A process for newly storing pending information is executed on the condition that the number of stored pending information is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is used to specify in the main CPU 63 that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operating port detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. It's a flag.

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the exit detection sensor 48a detects one game ball. is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the situation where the information "0" is stored to the situation where the information "1" is stored, the gate detection sensor 49a detects that one game ball is It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag used by the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the general map and general power control process (step S214) confirms that the gate winning flag is set to "1", and the general map stored in the general map holding area 65c. On the condition that the number of pieces of hold information on the side is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces, a process is executed to store the numerical information of the current general-purpose electricity random number counter C4 in the general-use figure holding area 65c as the holding information on the general-use figure side. do. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general figure general electric power control process (step S214), and when the process corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

Note that the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started at a 4 msec cycle as already explained, so when one ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, the entry ball In a situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect that one game ball, the main CPU 63 can specify that one game ball has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. It will be done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

<Configuration for paying out game balls>
Next, the contents of the processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be explained. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 15.

The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 includes a payout side CPU92 which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, a payout side ROM93, a payout side RAM94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The payout side ROM 93 is a memory such as a NOR type flash memory and a NAND type flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The payout side ROM93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU92.

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than the payout side ROM 93. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93.

The payout side CPU 92 is capable of bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the state is such that it is possible to normally pay out the game balls, and when it is determined that the state is such that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side CPU 92 stores information in the payout side RAM 94. To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout restriction command to the main side CPU 63 indicating that it is not possible to pay out normally. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 issue a notification indicating that it is not possible to normally pay out game balls. A notification command is sent to the audio light emission control device 81 so that The states in which it is not possible to normally pay out game balls include a full state in which the lower tray 56a is filled with game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a state in which the payout device 76 is not filled with game balls. There is an abnormal payout state in which the game machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is released from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 determines that the tank is full when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank sensor is canceled. It is determined that the full tank state has been released.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball path leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, and when the no-ball detection sensor continues to detect no game balls, the CPU 92 identifies the no-ball state. Specify that the no-ball state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76, and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 identifies a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor does not continuously detect a game ball even though the payout device 76 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is paid out. , it is determined that the abnormal payout state has been canceled when the state in which the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving a closing detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving an open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. It is specified that the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door open command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. At this timing, a front door closing command is sent to the main CPU 63. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door close command.

A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front side of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the dispensing side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closure detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. It is determined that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A main body closing command is sent to the main CPU 63 at the appropriate timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 16. The timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a predetermined period (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). As already explained, the full tank process is a process to identify whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if the tank is full. At the same time, a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state is released is sent to the main side CPU 63.

Thereafter, ball unnecessary processing is executed (step S402). As already explained, in the no-ball processing, a process is performed to identify whether there is no ball or not based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor, and to stop the payout of game balls if there is no ball. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is sent to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the no-ball state is released, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is released is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal payout state based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if it is in the abnormal payout state, a process is executed to stop the payout of game balls. At the same time, a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95, and if the front door frame 14 is in the open state, It executes a process to stop the payout of game balls, and also sends a front door opening command to the main CPU 63. Further, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a front door close command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S405). In the main body open monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body open sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball is At the same time, a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Furthermore, when the game machine main body 12 is closed, a process is executed to enable the payout of game balls, and a main body close command is sent to the main CPU 63.

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command sent by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. After executing the prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout device 76 pays out the game balls. A payout control process is executed to control the execution of (step S408). In the payout control process, when the information on the number of unpaid prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and controlled, and the payout detection sensor detects one game ball. In this case, the value of prize ball number information is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S409).

<Configuration for external output to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal board 97. The external terminal board 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal board 97 in this way, the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 can externally send information to the hall computer HC, as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

One external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal board 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96. In detail, regarding the configuration of this electrical connection, a signal relay board 98 is provided at a position in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branching from the signal path SL1 from the front door open sensor 95 to the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal board 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the front door opening sensor 95 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

More specifically, regarding the main body open sensor 96, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branching from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 toward the payout side CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal board 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result by the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for main body opening on the external terminal board 97. This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

Next, the contents of the information externally output from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be explained. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be explained.

In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), the main CPU 63 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the win/fail lottery mode is in the high probability mode, and information indicating that the first game round has ended. information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls are sent from the gaming area PA through any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been ejected, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 sets the output of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that ten game balls have been paid out.

The hall computer HC is able to grasp the manner in which game balls are paid out in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97. for example,
・Ball output rate which is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 ・Balls output in the normal gaming state that is not in the opening/closing execution mode or the high probability mode rate (hereinafter, this ball output rate will be referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in opening/closing execution mode ・Ball output rate in high probability mode ・Number of games played until 100 game balls are ejected from the playing area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as “ S”)
・BS × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34”
- The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 until 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + S2 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34")
etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. Note that the number of prize balls is the number of game balls that are paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry section.

<Configuration for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing winning modes of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66. In addition to these, the MPU 62 also includes an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from devices external to the MPU 62. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via an internal bus 103. Detection results from sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I/F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands, As already explained, various processes are executed by the main CPU 63. Furthermore, as a result of various processes being executed by the main side CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of various processes being executed by the CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101.

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided so that the connection terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is housed in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect a reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a and expose the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102. Note that the invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main control device 60 is formed in the board box 60a, so that the reading terminal 102 can be used for reading without destroying the board box 60a. A configuration may be adopted in which electrical connection of a reading device to the terminal 102 can be made.

The management IC 66 includes a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117. These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be able to communicate in both directions.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via a signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and also receives a signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. This is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the terminal. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111. Note that the main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for bidirectional communication built into the MPU 62 .

The management CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. The management side ROM 113 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory (ie, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for reading only. The management side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management side CPU 112. The management side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (that is, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The management side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the management side ROM 113. The management RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management ROM 113.

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to constantly measure date information and time information, and output the measured date information and time information according to instructions from the management CPU 112. Note that the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM (ie, volatile storage means) that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 is for storing information on the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122p. used for. Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be explained later.

The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory (that is, a nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing purposes. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of game balls received from the main CPU 63 through the management I/F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be explained later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be explained. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p can receive a signal to be input. When the input signal is at a LOW level, "0" information is stored as the first data, and when the input target signal is at a HI level, "1" information is stored as the second data. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and the first winning hole detection sensor 42a outputs one game ball. When a ball is detected, a first signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the first signal at HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game balls are detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the second winning hole detection sensor 43a outputs a second game ball. When a ball is detected, a second signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal at HI level is being input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a third signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, a third signal at HI level is output for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal at the HI level is being input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fourth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal at HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the fifth signal of LOW level in the situation where no new game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 46a, and the first operating port detection sensor 46a outputs the fifth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a fifth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal at the HI level is being input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the sixth signal of LOW level in a situation where the second operating port detection sensor 47a does not detect a new game ball, and the second operating port detection sensor 47a outputs the sixth signal of LOW level. When a ball is detected, a sixth signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth signal at the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the seventh signal of LOW level in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a, and when one game ball is detected by the exit detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the seventh signal at HI level is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not present, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is present.

A ninth signal corresponding to whether the high probability mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at LOW level when the mode is not high probability mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at HI level when the mode is high probability mode.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open period is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues to output the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. and output.

An output instruction signal for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize an opportunity to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is input to the 16th buffer 122p. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal when there is no need to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p.

Although signals from the main CPU 63 can be input to the 11th buffer 122k, 12th buffer 122l, 13th buffer 122m, 14th buffer 122n, and 15th buffer 122o, normal signals are not input in this pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, by providing the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this pachinko machine 10 with more buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66, It becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the signal paths 118k to 118o are not formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

It has been decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Specification of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described in detail later, but when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the type of these signals is specified from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management CPU 112 identifies the types of various signals in a situation where operating power is supplied, Information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence memory 116 stores first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. It is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b. In addition, the second correspondence area 123b also includes information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored. The third correspondence area 123c stores information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 (10 balls). Stored.

The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric winning device 32 (15 balls). Stored. Information indicating that the signal is the first operating port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, the fifth correspondence area 123e contains information indicating that it is the first operating port 33, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the second operating port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f. In addition, the sixth correspondence area 123f contains information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, as well as information on the number of game balls that will be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (1 ) are also stored. Information indicating that the signal is the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is used as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. Information indicating the high probability mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types. The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them.

As described above, the configuration is such that the management CPU 112 specifies what kind of signals are input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. , it becomes possible to use the management IC 66 for a model different from the present pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

Furthermore, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the type of signal is recognized in advance. Information for the management CPU 112 to specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. The configuration is as follows. As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of signal is output each time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the main It becomes possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112.

Additionally, the management CPU 112 outputs information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o when supply of operating power is started. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the 16th buffer 122p can be specified for the output instruction signal to be used reliably, not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. It becomes possible to omit the processing for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for identifying the type of signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a 1 byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence relationship information in accordance with the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of this pachinko machine 10), First, the date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written. After that, the correspondence information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence memory 116, and the read correspondence information is is stored in the area for storing correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information currently being written.

Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of ball entry portion corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a detect game balls that have entered the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is a general winning hole 31 is stored. Further, the fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operating port 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating that it is the second operating port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating that it is the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball entry part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is The information about the type of ball entering part is read out from one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the information about the type of ball entering part is stored as is in the area for storing correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high probability mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high probability mode. A signal indicating whether the door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is set, the ninth correspondence area 123i stores information indicating that the high probability mode is set, and the tenth correspondence area 123j stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is set. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in .

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 8th signal at LOW level when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, and continuously outputs the 8th signal at HI level when the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information. Furthermore, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information are transferred to the history information storage area 123h. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 9th signal at LOW level when the mode is not high probability mode, and continuously outputs the 9th signal at HI level when the mode is high probability mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the high probability mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the high probability mode has ended when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information are transferred to the history information storage area 123i. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information. Further, when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high probability mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information are transferred to the history information storage area 123i. is stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the 10th signal at LOW level when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the 10th signal at HI level when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continue outputting, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It becomes possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. Then, in both cases where the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management CPU 112 receives an opportunity to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Specify that In other words, when the 10th signal changes from LOW level to HI level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored in the history information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125. Moreover, when the 10th signal changes from HI level to LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is the front door frame 14 read from the 10th correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. It is stored in the area for storing correspondence information in area 125.

The history information storage area 125 is capable of storing all the history information that has occurred during that period, even if there are 10 consecutive business days in which the pachinko machine 10 continues to fire game balls from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times in a day, more than 600,000 history information storage areas 125 are provided. This allows all history information to be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently being written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information that specifies pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time a piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1. When the pointer information in the last order becomes the write target and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" becomes the write target. The information in the area 126 is updated. As a result, if an opportunity arises to store history information that exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, the history information storage area 125 where the oldest history information is stored will be overwritten with new history information in order. Become.

Furthermore, when the reading device reads history information from the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to all "0", and the pointer information of "0" is set to be written. Information in the pointer area 126 is updated. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has once been targeted for reading from becoming targeted for reading again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be explained. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and signal types in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11).

First, a recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "15" (step S501). The recognition output counter measures the remaining number of information outputs necessary for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for identification by the main CPU 63. As already explained, since the 15 first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized for their signal types, "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, output processing of an identification start command is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize which types of signals the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When outputting this command, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management CPU 112 recognize which type of signal the signals 122o to 122o correspond to. This reduces the number of signal paths compared to a configuration in which the signal path for outputting the command is provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification start command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to each other such that the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and then the nth buffer and then the n+1th buffer become the signal type setting target. The recognition setting for the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "15" to "13", it is the general winning hole 31 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "12", it is a special prize winning hole. Read out a type identification command indicating that the device is the device 32 and the number of prize balls, and if the recognition output counter is “11”, read a type identification command indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls; If the output counter for recognition is "10", it is the second operating port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read out, and if the output counter for recognition is "9", it is determined that it is the out port 24a. If the output counter for recognition is "8", read out the type identification command that indicates the opening/closing execution mode, and if the output counter for recognition is "7", it is the high probability mode. If the output counter for recognition is "6", read out the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14, and if the output counter for recognition is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read out the type identification command that indicates that there is a type.

Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has a data capacity of 8 bits like the identification start command, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In addition, in the process of outputting the identification type command, in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification type command is started. In addition, the output period of the identification type command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 assigns correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current setting target buffer among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o to correspond to the identification type command. Store information to be used.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S506). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after being subtracted by 1 is executed (steps S503 and Step S504).

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S506: YES), output processing of the identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Furthermore, in the process of outputting the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when outputting the identification end command is started, in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. In addition, the output period of the identification end command and the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. has been done. By receiving the identification end command, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the process for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is started. The combination of processes from step S606 onward in the management process is executed 16 or more times before the process starts.

When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter used by the management CPU 112 to specify the types of the buffers 122a to 122o whose signal types are to be set. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and thereafter the signal type is set to the nth buffer and then the (n+1)th buffer.

Thereafter, on the condition that a type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), a correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the currently received type identification is placed in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information about the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S605).

If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process in step S605 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on the condition that a new type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 are performed. Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, a history setting process is executed to store history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, although the details will be described later. In step S608, although details will be described later, external output processing is executed to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102.

FIG. 23 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 23(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows the period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, and FIG. 23(d) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed, and FIG. 23(d) shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed by the management CPU 112.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 23(a). Ru. Further, at the timing t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 23(b). Thereafter, at timing t2, when the identification start command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level, as shown in FIG. 23(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 identifies that the command is being sent from the main side CPU 63, and outputs the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 enters the identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 22). Thereafter, at timing t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 23(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 23(a). Further, at the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level as shown in FIG. 23(b). Thereafter, at timing t5 when the type identification command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 23(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 23(d). In the correspondence relationship setting process, information indicating that it is a general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 23(a).

After that, at each of the timings from t7 to t9, from t10 to t12, from t13 to t15, and from t16 to t18, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the 15th type identification command is completed from timing t16 to timing t18.

Thereafter, at timing t19, output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 23(a). Further, at the timing t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level, as shown in FIG. 23(b). Thereafter, at timing t20 when the identification end command continues to be output, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 23(b). The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and updates the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main CPU 63 can be grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management CPU 112 ends at timing t20 as shown in FIG. 23(c). Thereafter, at timing t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 23(a).

As described above, by using the ninth signal to make the management CPU 112 recognize whether or not a command is being output, it is possible to instruct the management CPU 112 as to when to store history information. Even in a configuration where command output is performed using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths), it is clearly made clear to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, a management target counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "10" (step S701). The managed target counter allows the main CPU 63 to determine whether or not there is a managed target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. It is also a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed for which management target. The management targets for which the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items including whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high probability mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened or closed. Therefore, first, the managed counter is set to "10".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is at the HI level (step S702). If the level is not HI (step S702: NO), by determining whether the value of the managed counter is 4 or more, the ball entering detection sensor 42a has seven managed targets corresponding to the value of the managed counter. -48a is specified (step S703).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether the output flag of the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether the first output flag is set to "1", If the value of the counter to be managed is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the counter to be managed is determined. is "8" and corresponds to the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "7". Yes, if it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether the fourth output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operating port detection sensor 46a is determined. If it is compatible with the second operating port detection sensor 47a, it is determined whether the fifth output flag is set to "1" or not, and the value of the managed counter is "5" and it corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a. In this case, it is determined whether the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to "1". 1" is set. As already explained, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S705). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether a transition to the opening/closing execution mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "2", the high It is determined whether a transition to the probability mode has occurred, and if the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether the front door frame 14 has entered the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S708).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level (step S709). Specifically, if the value of the counter to be managed is 4 or more and the current target to be managed is any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is It is determined whether a HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the corresponding signal was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 22) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal that has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This is a period during which the management CPU 112 can reliably identify the state. In addition, if the value of the managed target counter is "3" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode has ended, and if the value of the managed target counter is "2" and the current managed target is in the open/close execution mode. If the current management target is the high probability mode, it is determined whether the high probability mode has ended, and if the value of the management target counter is "1" and the current management target is the front door frame 14, determines whether the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. If an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S710).

If a negative determination is made in step S704, if the process of step S706 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S707, if the process of step S708 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S709, or if a negative determination is made in step S709, or When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether the value of the managed counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processes from step S702 onwards are executed for the managed object corresponding to the new managed object counter value.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a check target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, "10" is set in the check target counter in step S801. do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the 10th buffer 122j is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, if the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the opening/closing execution mode, the information indicating that the high probability mode is in the mode, and the information indicating that the front door frame 14 is Not only correspondence information but also start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. Note that when the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the 10th correspondence area 123j is the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

When the writing process is executed as described above, and the value of the check target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored. The combination of correspondence information indicating that the information is either one of the above is stored as history information. In addition, if the value of the counter to be checked is in the opening/closing execution mode, high probability mode, or front door frame 14, RTC information and , the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored as history information.

Thereafter, target pointer update processing is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out and incremented by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process in step S805 is executed, the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked indicate whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level. It is determined whether correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the current value of the counter to be checked is "8" to "10", information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j, and information indicating that the high probability mode is in the corresponding correspondence area 123h to 123j. Since either the information indicating that the door frame is the front door frame 14 or the information indicating that the door frame is the front door frame 14 are stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". By checking whether the input signal from the main CPU 63 has been input to the buffer, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). When an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read out in the same manner as in step S803 (step S808), and further, a writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Furthermore, not only the correspondence information but also the termination information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, if the value of the check target counter is one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, the value corresponds to the pointer information that is the target of writing. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating that the mode is one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the front door frame 14, and the end information is stored as history information. state. Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed in the same manner as step S805 (step S810).

If a negative determination is made in step S806, if a negative determination is made in step S807, or if the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S812). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the process from step S802 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

Next, the manner in which history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 26. FIG. 26(a) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 26(b) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 26(c) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 26(d) shows a period when a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 26(e) shows the writing timing of history information to the history memory 117.

At timing t1, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level, as shown in FIG. 26(a). Therefore, at the timing of t1, history information is written into the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. 26(e). Thereafter, at timing t2, the signal that was switched to HI level at timing t1 is switched to LOW level, as shown in FIG. 26(a). However, since this signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the switching of the LOW level is not subject to storage of history information, at the timing of t2, the signal shown in FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(a), the first to seventh buffers 122a The output state of the signal input to any of the signals 122g to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 26(e).

As shown in FIG. 26(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is at HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the opening/closing execution mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), the timing t4 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the field is in the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is at HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not a high probability mode occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), the timing t8 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal changes to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the execution period of the high probability mode.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is in the high probability mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has hit a target is in the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 26(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is at HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. This tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(e), the timing t12 is the timing at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. History information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Thereby, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it becomes possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Furthermore, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time. Therefore, while the front door frame 14 is open, history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is displayed. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the one or not. In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, by comparing the RTC information, it is possible to determine which of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the front door frame 14 is while the front door frame 14 is being opened.

Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 11).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether a connection signal indicating that a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when receiving the connection signal through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, this data output processing is immediately terminated. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Therefore, in order to output history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . The power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back of the back pack unit 15. It is necessary to open the game machine main body 12 and expose the back side of the back pack unit 15. Under these circumstances, in order to output history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With this configuration, even if someone other than the game hall manager attempts to read the history information, it becomes difficult to do so.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal is received from the reading terminal 102, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is confirmed to be It is determined whether the control information (program and data) confirmation is supported (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to confirm both control information and history information, and if confirmation of control information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, the reading device can confirm the control information. A signal is transmitted, and if confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the reading device for checking control information and the reading device for checking history are separate. In this case, if a reading device for checking control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for checking the control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading device for checking the history is sent to the reading terminal 102. If the device is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading device.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output processing, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to read the control information with a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and confirm whether the control information is genuine or normal. It becomes possible to do this.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period of time. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. This process will be explained in detail later.

When the process of step S903 or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If the process is being continued (step S905: YES), the process continues to wait in step S905. This makes it possible to prevent the processing set to be executed after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), this data output processing is ended.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), processing for outputting history information from step S1002 onwards is executed. Specifically, first, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the output port 24a is stored, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the ball enters the general winning hole 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball enters the general winning hole 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball entering the special electric winning device 32 can be counted. The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the first actuation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information on the first actuation port 33 is stored. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that the second actuation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, information on the second actuation port 34 is stored. The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 where the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the information and the end information are stored, the exit that occurred when the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be detected. 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, and second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored; The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the termination information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, and a correspondence relationship that indicates that it is the front door frame 14. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the front door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 exists. If the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are not stored in the history information storage area 125 where is stored, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 in which the front door frame 14 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1007, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1002 is defined as the number of balls entering K1, and the difference between the number of balls entering the exit port 24a calculated in step S1003 and the number of balls entering the outlet 24a calculated in step S1007 is defined as the difference between the number of balls entering the exit port 24a calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning hole 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2, and the difference between the number of entered balls in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entered balls calculated in step S1004 is defined as the number of entered balls K3, The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 and the number of balls entering the ball calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of balls entering K4. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is defined as the number of balls entering K5.
・First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "First operating opening Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the technique area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is (referred to as “D1”)
・Second parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5)・Third parameter: Game balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K3/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) 4th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K4/discharging from gaming area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D2")
- Fifth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K5/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1 - (D2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D3 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 ”) After that, using the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the total amount required to extract all the history information that was the target of the calculation this time The time is calculated (step S1009). Then, first output processing is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Further, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially outputted to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is outputted to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the first output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 stores correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information, and the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode exists. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the end information is stored, the out exit 24a and the general winning opening 31 that have occurred in the opening/closing execution mode are , the number of balls entering each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect and start information are stored, and correspondence relationship information and end information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, and correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Furthermore, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being stored are stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled as being in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, during the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entering balls is the same as that in step S1007, except that the period in the opening/closing execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open, calculated in step S1012, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls entering K11, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1011 is The difference between the number of balls entered in the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the difference between the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1012. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number K13 of entering balls, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entering balls K13. The number of balls entered is K14, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1012 is set as the number K15 of entering balls.
- 11th parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "First operating opening 33 Ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
- 12th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K12/total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) - 13th parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K13/total number of game balls ejected from gaming area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) ・14th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K14/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D12")
・Fifteenth parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K15/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D13")
- 16th parameter: D11 - (D12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
- 17th parameter: (K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K15 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning in the winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K15 x "Second operating port 34 18th parameter: K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31") "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34" ”) After that, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 stores correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and start information, and the correspondence relationship information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and the start information are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists during the period between the history information storage area 125 where the end information is stored, the out exit 24a and general winning opening 31 that occurred in the high probability mode , the number of balls entering each of the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1015). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and start information are stored, and correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and end information. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, there is a history information storage area 125 where correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and start information are stored, and a history information storage area 125 where correspondence information indicating that the mode is high probability mode and start information are stored. If there are multiple sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of balls entered for each section is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating that the mode is high probability mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. If the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the mode is a high probability mode are not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, the correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the mode is a high probability mode are stored. All history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as being in the high probability mode.

After that, during the period in the high probability mode specified in step S1015, the out exit 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method for calculating the number of balls entering the ball is the same as in step S1007, except that the period in the high probability mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls that occur while the front door frame 14 is open, calculated in step S1016, is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of balls entered after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the out port 24a calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls entering K21, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1015 is The difference between the number of balls entered into the general winning slot 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the difference between the number of balls entered into the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entered in the special wire winning device 32 calculated in step S1016. The difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference between the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entering balls K23. The number K24 is defined as the number of balls entering the second operating port 34, and the difference between the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number K25.
- 21st parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K22 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the general winning opening 31" + K23 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "First operating opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")/(Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34) D11”)
・22nd parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the general winning slot 31 K22/total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・23rd parameter: Game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 Ratio of total number of game balls entering K23/total number of game balls discharged from gaming area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) ・24th parameter: Total number of game balls entering first operating port 33 K24/ejecting from gaming area PA The ratio of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D22")
・25th parameter: Ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K25/total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereinafter, this ratio will be referred to as "D23")
・26th parameter: D21 - (D22 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + D23 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the second operating port 34")
Thereafter, third output processing is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. After that, clearing processing is executed (step S1019). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state.

<Configuration of special electric prize winning device 32>
Next, the configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 will be explained. FIG. 29 is a front view of the game board 24 showing an enlarged view of the area where the special electric winning device 32 is provided.

The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA, as already explained. The position where this special electric prize winning device 32 is provided is a vertically intermediate position in the right side area PA3, and at the intermediate position, the special electric prize winning device 32 is located at the right part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 in the center frame 36a. It extends in the lateral direction from a certain right frame portion 36g to the right end portion of the gaming area PA. By providing the special electric winning device 32 extending in the horizontal direction in this way, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 will surely pass through the area where the special electric winning device 32 is provided.

The special electric winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201 in which an upstream region of the fourth discharge passage section 45 is formed, an opening/closing member 202 that prevents or allows a game ball to enter the fourth discharge passage section 45, and an opening/closing member. A guide member 203 that guides the movement of 202 is provided. The passage forming body 201 is integrated with the right frame portion 36g of the center frame 36a, and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the board surface of the game board 24. An upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage section 45 is formed in the passage formation body 201 such that an inlet portion 45b exists in the right wall portion 201a of the passage formation body 201.

The entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is open toward the right, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can enter therein. The upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage section 45 is sloped downward to the left in the region continuing from the entrance section 45b, but on the downstream side thereof, the game ball is led out to the back side of the game board 24. At the same time, the direction of the passage is changed so that the game balls are led out below the game board 24. The outlet of the upstream region 45c of the fourth discharge passage section 45 is located on the back side of the game board 24, and the outlet section of the downstream region 45d of the fourth discharge passage section 45 provided on the back side of the game board 24 is located on the back side of the game board 24. Connected to the entrance. A downstream region 45d of the fourth discharge passage section 45 extends vertically toward the bottom of the game board 24. With the above configuration, the game balls that have entered the fourth discharge passage section 45 are discharged below the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24. As already explained, the fourth discharge passage section 45 is provided with a special electric detection sensor 45a for detecting the game ball that has entered the fourth discharge passage section 45 (that is, the game ball that has entered the special electric winning device 32). However, the special electric detection sensor 45a is installed in the passage forming body 201.

An opening/closing member 202 is provided to open and close the inlet section 45b of the fourth discharge passage section 45. FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the opening/closing member 202, and FIG. 31 is a perspective view of the passage forming body 201 and the opening/closing member 202 showing how the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage section 45 is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 202. FIG. 32 is a plan view of the opening/closing member 202 and the special electric drive section 32b.

The opening/closing member 202 is made of synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. A blocking portion 212 is integrally formed with the base portion 211 so as to stand vertically on one end side in the direction. The base portion 211 is formed with an opening 213 that vertically passes through the base portion 211 . The opening 213 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the lateral dimension of the opening 213 is set to be more than multiple times the diameter of the game ball, and specifically set to be larger than 5 times the diameter of the game ball and smaller than 6 times the diameter of the game ball. has been done. Although this opening 213 is formed at a position in the base part 211 that is offset to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, it is located in the middle of the base part 211 both in the front-rear direction and in the lateral direction. A plate-like portion exists around the opening 213.

A blocking portion 212 is formed in the base portion 211 so as to stand upward from the left peripheral edge of the opening 213 . The blocking portion 212 is formed into a plate shape, and a pair of front and back plate surfaces face in the horizontal direction. The area of the plate surface of the blocking part 212 is such that, as shown in FIG. It is set to a size that allows it to be completely closed.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 31, the opening/closing member 202 is supported by each of the passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 in a slidable manner in the front-back direction of the Pachinko machine 10. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the guide member 203 is provided to extend in the lateral direction from the right end portion of the game area PA to the front side of the passage forming body 201. The passage forming body 201 and the guide member 203 are provided with a slide through hole 221 that penetrates the game board 24 in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10. The slide through hole 221 is formed to be one size larger than the outer edge portion of the opening/closing member 202 when viewed from the front. An opening/closing member 202 is inserted into this slide through hole 221, and the opening/closing member 202 can slide along the slide through hole 221 in the front and back direction of the Pachinko machine 10.

In the state inserted into the slide through hole 221, the blocking part 212 of the opening/closing member 202 is located at a position close to the right plate surface of the right wall part 201a where the entrance part 45b of the fourth discharge passage part 45 is formed in the passage forming body 201. We will face each other at. Although the distance between the right side plate surface of the right wall portion 201a and the blocking portion 212 is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, the blocking portion 212 prevents the game ball from entering the fourth discharge passage portion 45. The distance is arbitrary as long as it is possible to block the right wall part 201a.Furthermore, the right side plate surface of the right wall part 201a and the blocking part 212 are in contact with each other, so that when the opening/closing member 202 moves, the blocking part 212 will stop the right wall part 201a from moving. It may be configured to slide on the right side plate surface.

The opening/closing member 202 is in a closed position where the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 as shown in FIG. The blocking part 212 is moved to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the entrance part 45b of 45, and can be moved to an open position where the entrance part 45b is opened toward the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, a special electric drive unit 32b for sliding the opening/closing member 202 in the front and back direction of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the rear side of the opening/closing member 202 of the pachinko machine 10. The special electric drive unit 32b is a solenoid that is an electric actuator. In a non-driving state in which a drive signal is not output from the main side CPU 63 to the special electric drive unit 32b, the output unit 226 of the special electric drive unit 32b is activated by the biasing force of the urging member 225 of the special electric drive unit 32b. is placed in the protruding position. On the other hand, in a driving state in which a drive signal is output from the main side CPU 63 to the special electric drive unit 32b, a pulling force is applied to the output unit 226 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the output unit 226 The pachinko machine 10 moves toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 against the biasing force of the biasing member 225 and is placed in the retreat position. The tip of the output section 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening/closing member 202. Therefore, when the drive section 32b for special electricity is in a non-driving state and the output section 226 is arranged in the protruding position, the opening/closing member 202 is arranged in the closed position as shown in FIG. When the drive section 32b is in the driven state and the output section 226 is disposed in the retracted position, the opening/closing member 202 is disposed in the open position as shown in FIG. 31(b). Note that the main body 227 of the special electric drive unit 32b is located on the back side of the game board 24, and the output unit 226 is connected to the rear end of the opening/closing member 202. The drive unit 32b is not visible or is difficult to see.

In addition to FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), FIG. 33(a) and FIG. ). 33(a) and 33(b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA in FIG. 29. Further, FIGS. 31(a) and 33(a) show the opening/closing member 202 in the closed position, and FIGS. 31(b) and 33(b) show the opening/closing member 202 in the open position. Indicates the state in which First, a case will be described in which the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position.

When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202, as shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 33(a). . Thereby, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the game balls are prevented from entering the fourth discharge passage section 45.

Regardless of whether or not the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the opening 213 of the base portion 211 exists to the right of the blocking portion 212 as already described. In addition, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the guide plate portion 214, which is a region in front of the pachinko machine 10 than the opening portion 213 in the base portion 211, has a front end that is connected to the window of the front door frame 14. It faces the panel 52 at a close position. The distance between the tip of the guide plate 214 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, even if the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 tries to flow downward from the front end of the guide plate part 214, it will not flow down. It is blocked by the window panel 52.

When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the left end portion of the guide plate portion 214 extends in the front-rear direction at a position below the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 in the passage forming body 201. It enters into the formed slide through hole 221. In this case, the upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 is sloped downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and sloped downward toward the left. In this configuration, the passage forming body 201 protrudes to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24, and the front end of the passage forming body 201 faces the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 at a position close to it. There is. The distance between the front end of the passage forming body 201 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, even if the game ball tries to move from the left end of the guide plate section 214 to the left side of the guide plate section 214, the passage forming body 201 prevents it from moving. Ru. The upper surface of the guide plate part 214 is not only sloped downward to the left as described above, but also sloped downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, so that the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. In the state where the game ball is placed on the guide plate part 214, the game ball moves toward the opening 213 due to its own weight and flows into the opening 213.

Here, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the guide member 203 is provided so as to protrude to the front of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the board surface of the game board 24, and the forwardly protruding portion thereof is placed in the closed position. The base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is opposed from above. In this forwardly protruding portion, a left region 232 excluding the right end receiving portion 231 extends laterally along the opening 213 of the base portion 211 when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position. However, the amount of protrusion of the left side region 232 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 is such that the opening 213 of the base portion 211 is not included in the opposing range. This prevents the opening 213 from being blocked by the guide member 203 when the opening/closing member 202 is in the closed position. Further, since the front-back dimension of the left side area 232 is less than the radius of the game ball, the game ball will not ride on the left side area 232.

On the other hand, in the guide member 203, the receiving part 231, which is present on the right side of the opening part 213 of the opening/closing member 202, protrudes more forward than the left side area 232 of the pachinko machine 10, and its front end is connected to the front door frame 10. It faces the window panel 52 at a close position. The distance between the tip of the receiving portion 231 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball. As a result, even if the game ball placed on the receiving part 231 tries to flow downward from the front end of the receiving part 231, the window panel 52 will prevent it from flowing down. In addition, since the receiving part 231 is located at the right end of the game board 24, even if the game ball placed on the receiving part 231 tries to flow downward from the right end of the receiving part 231, it will not reach the resin base 21. At this point, the player is blocked by a portion provided on the right side of the game board 24.

The upper surface of the receiving part 231 is set so that both the front-back dimension and the lateral dimension are larger than the diameter of the game ball. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the front region 233 on the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is located on the front side of the Pachinko machine 10 with respect to the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 arranged in the closed position. A regulating portion 234 is provided on the left edge of the front area 233 to prevent the game ball placed on the front area 233 from falling from the left edge of the front area 233 to the left side of the front area 233. It is integrally formed. Further, the front area 233 is sloped downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game ball placed on the front area 233 on the upper surface of the receiving part 231 will move to the rear area 235 on the upper surface of the receiving part 231 due to its own weight. The rear region 235 slopes downward toward the left, and there is no part that prevents the game ball from flowing down from the left end of the rear region 235 to the left of the rear region 235. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the game ball resting on the rear area 235 on the upper surface of the receiving part 231 moves toward the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 due to its own weight, and moves toward the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202. 213.

Next, a case will be described in which the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position. When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is closed by the blocking portion 212 of the opening/closing member 202, as shown in FIGS. 31(b) and 33(b). It is open to the right. This allows the game balls to enter the fourth discharge passage section 45.

When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, the entire opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is placed within the slide through hole 221, and the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 The guide plate portion 214 of the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 is present on the right side. In this case, the guide plate portion 214 extends in the lateral direction between the inlet portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 and the rear region 235 of the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203, as shown in FIG. 33(b). It will extend to As already explained, since the upper surface of the receiving part 231 is sloped downward toward the left end of the rear area 235, the game ball resting on the upper surface of the receiving part 231 is tilted toward the guide plate part 214 due to its own weight. Since the upper surface of the guiding plate part 214 is sloped downward to the left, the game ball resting on the upper surface of the guiding plate part 214 will be moved by its own weight to the entrance part 45b of the fourth discharge passage part 45. will move towards. In other words, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the receiving section 231 or the upper surface of the guiding plate section 214 are pushed toward the entrance section 45b of the fourth discharge passage section 45 due to their own weight. The ball moves and enters the entrance portion 45b. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is disposed in the open position, not only is it possible for the game ball to enter the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, but also the entrance of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is enabled. The entry of the game ball into the portion 45b is guided by the opening/closing member 202.

When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, the opening/closing member 202 moves further to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 than when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position. The distance between the window panel 52 and the window panel 52 becomes wider. This distance is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, depending on the direction and momentum of the game ball flowing down toward the special electric winning device 32 in the right area PA3, the game ball may enter the space between the guide plate section 214 and the window panel 52, and the space may be closed. The game balls may also flow down below the special electric winning device 32. In other words, even in a situation where the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, the game ball that has reached the position of the special electric winning device 32 flows down below the special electric winning device 32 without winning the special electric winning device 32. Things can happen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by integrally forming a projecting portion that protrudes upward over the entire front end of the guide plate portion 214, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 can be It may be configured such that it cannot fall or is difficult to fall downward from the front end of the part 214.

Next, referring again to FIG. 29, a configuration for making the falling manner of the game ball in the right side area PA3 a predetermined manner will be described.

In the right side area PA3, on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32, the game ball flowing down the upstream side of the right side area PA3 is placed on the right end side of the special electric winning device 32, more specifically, the receiving part 231 of the guide member 203 and its Guidance means are provided for guiding to the surroundings. As the guiding means, a guiding nail group 241 including a plurality of nails 24b is provided. In the guiding nail group 241, a plurality of nails 24b are arranged downward to the right so as to create a guiding part that slopes downward from the right frame part 36g of the center frame 36a toward the receiving part 231 of the guide member 203. It is formed of. In this case, the distance between the nail 24b existing at the left end in the guide nail group 241 and the right frame portion 36g is set to be less than the radius of the game ball, and the distance between adjacent nails 24b in the guide nail group 241 is also set to be less than the radius of the game ball. It is set to less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the guide nail group 241 is guided toward the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 by the guiding portion formed by the guide nail group 241.

When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the game ball guided to the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 is guided to the opening 213 in the base portion 211 of the opening/closing member 202 by the upper surface of the receiving portion 231 as already explained. and flows into the opening 213. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the game ball that flows down the right side area PA3 and reaches the special electric winning device 32 flows into the area near the receiving part 231 in the opening 213 of the base part 211. Then, it flows down toward the bottom of the special electric prize winning device 32.

Here, as already explained, the through gate 35 is provided in the right side area PA3, and the through gate 35 is arranged near the path forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32 on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32. . In addition, between the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35, only game balls that have flowed down from the position near the path forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32 to the lower part of the special electric winning device 32 can enter the through gate 35. A regulating nail group 242 is provided to ensure that. This prevents the game balls that have reached the special electric winning device 32 from passing through the through gate 35 while the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is disposed at the open position, the game ball that has reached the special electric winning device 32 passes over the guide plate section 214 of the base section 211 to the entrance of the fourth discharge passage section 45. It will flow down towards 45b. In this case, if the opening/closing member 202 is maintained at the open position until the game ball resting on the guide plate part 214 reaches the entrance part 45b of the fourth discharge passage part 45, the game ball will The ball enters the entrance portion 45b. On the other hand, if the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position before reaching the entrance part 45b, the game ball resting on the guide plate part 214 at that time will move to the guide plate part 214. After moving to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 following the movement of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 , it is guided to the opening 213 of the base part 211 along the slope of the upper surface of the guide plate part 214 and flows into the opening 213 . Become. Therefore, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while a game ball is present in a predetermined range X near the passage forming body 201 on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball At a position close to 201, it flows downward from the special electric prize winning device 32 and passes through the through gate 35. Then, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the reservation information on the general figure side is acquired, and an opportunity to open the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 occurs. In other words, the opportunity for the ball to enter the through gate 35, that is, the opportunity for opening the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, occurs only in the opening/closing execution mode.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 34, a description will be given of how a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 in the opening/closing execution mode. FIG. 34(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 34(b) shows the opening/closing state of the special electric winning device 32, and FIG. 34(c) shows the timing when winning to the through gate 35 occurs. FIG. 34(d) shows the execution period when the second operating port 34 is in the open state, and FIG. 34(e) shows the timing at which a winning to the second operating port 34 occurs. Note that when the normal current is in the open state, the open state of the second operating port 34 occurs multiple times, but in FIG. 34, for convenience of explanation, the open state of the second operating port 34 occurs only once. It will be explained as follows.

At timing t1, the opening/closing execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 34(a). In the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 34(b), a round game is executed during each period from timing t2 to timing t3, timing from t7 to timing t9, timing from t13 to timing t15, etc. The device 32 becomes open.

Among these round games, in the round game between timing t2 and timing t3 and the round game between timing t7 and timing t9, the special electric winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing t3 and the timing t9. In each of the above, a game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32. Then, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position and the special electric winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state at each of timing t3 and timing t9, the special electric winning device 32 is placed on the guide plate portion 214. The game ball falls into the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202. The fallen game ball enters the through gate 35 at each of timing t4 and timing t10, as shown in FIG. 34(c). As a result, the pending information on the common picture side is acquired, and the variable display of the picture is started on the common picture display section 38a. Then, when the fluctuating display of the pattern is finished, the power supply of the second operating port 34 is changed from timing t5 to timing t8 and from timing t11 to timing t14, as shown in FIG. 34(d). The accessory 34a is in an open state. As already explained, even a game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can reach the position where the second actuation port 34 is provided, so if you are trying to make the game ball win in the special electric winning device 32 and aim it toward the right side area PA3. By continuing to fire the game ball, a prize is won in the second operating port 34 at each of timing t6 and timing t12, as shown in FIG. 34(e). Thereby, the second reservation information is acquired. Since the start of a new game round is blocked while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the execution of the validity judgment process for the acquired second hold information and the start of a game round triggered by the second hold information are as follows: This is done after the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, in the round game from the timing t13 to the timing t15, the game ball is placed on the guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 at the timing t15 when the special electric winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state. Even if the game ball is not placed on the guiding plate part 214, the game ball does not fall to a position where the ball can enter the through gate 35. Therefore, no prize is won in the through gate 35 upon completion of the round game.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34(a), the opening/closing execution mode occurs at timing t16. At the timing when the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the reservation information on the general drawing side is held and stored in the general drawing holding area 65c. As a result, opening of the second operating port 34 is started at timing t17, which is the timing after the opening/closing execution mode ends, as shown in FIG. 34(d), and this opening period continues until timing t19. Then, during this period, the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 or the right area PA3, so that the prize enters the second operating port 34 at the timing t18 as shown in FIG. 34(e). Occur. In this case, if the upper limit number of second reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 at this point, the second reservation information is newly acquired. Then, the second pending information becomes a target for execution of the validity determination process and becomes an opportunity to start a new game round.

<Execution mode of opening/closing execution mode>
Next, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained. FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the jackpot results are 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R low probability result, 6R high probability result, 10R low probability result, 10R high probability result. As a result, there are 16R low-certainty results and 16R high-certainty results. In all of these opening/closing execution modes that occur when a jackpot result occurs, the interval period between each round game is set to 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 35(a). In addition, in each of these opening/closing execution modes, the upper limit number of prizes to be won to the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is set to 10, and the opening duration period of each round game is set to 29 seconds. In each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once.

On the other hand, the number of round games that occur in these open/close execution modes is different. Specifically, the number of round games is set to 2 for 2R low-probability results and 2R high-probability results, and the number of round games is set to 4 for 4R low-probability results and 4R high-probability results. , 6R low-certainty result and 6R high-certainty result, the number of round games is set to 6, and 10R low-certainty result and 10R high-certainty result, the number of round games is set to 10, and 16R low-certainty result. The number of round games is set to 16 in the result and 16R high probability result. As the number of executions of the round game increases, the number of balls entering the special electric prize winning device 32 in one opening/closing execution mode increases, so the jackpot result with a large number of executions of the round game is more advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, the more times the round game is executed, the more times the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 slides between the open position and the closed position. As already explained, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 at the timing when the opening/closing member 202 slides from the open position to the closed position can enter the through gate 35. Therefore, the more times the opening/closing member 202 slides between the open position and the closed position, the more frequently winnings will occur in the through gate 35, and the winnings in the through gate 35 will cause the second There will be an opportunity for the general electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34 to be in the open state. Then, when the second pending information acquired due to the occurrence of a winning in the second operating port 34 is subject to execution of the win/fail judgment process, either a jackpot result or a small win result will occur, so it is certain that An open/close execution mode will occur. From this point of view as well, a jackpot result with a large number of round game executions is more advantageous for the player.

A low probability result and a high probability result are each set as the jackpot result in which the number of executions of the round game is the same. That is, a 2R low probability result and a 2R high probability result are set as jackpot results when the round game is executed twice. Furthermore, a 4R low-probability result and a 4R high-probability result are set as jackpot results when the round game is executed four times. Further, a 6R low probability result and a 6R high probability result are set as jackpot results when the round game is executed six times. Furthermore, a 10R low probability result and a 10R high probability result are set as jackpot results when the round game is executed 10 times. Furthermore, a 16R low probability result and a 16R high probability result are set as jackpot results when the round game is executed 16 times. As a result, the jackpot result in which the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is the same, the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability result. There is a high probability result that is a probability mode. Therefore, regarding the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, there are jackpot results that have the same profit level for the player but differ in the settings of the win/fail lottery mode, and the player has expectations regarding the type of jackpot result. The number of target types increases.

As already explained, in this embodiment, there are a first small winning result, a second small winning result, and a third small winning result as small winning results. As shown in FIG. 35(b), the upper limit number of winnings is set to 10 in each of the opening/closing execution modes that occur when a small win results. On the other hand, the number of openings of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode and the duration of opening of the special electric winning device 32 in each opening time are different for each small winning result.

FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining how the opening/closing execution mode is executed in response to a small winning result. 36(a1), FIG. 36(a2) and FIG. 36(a3) show the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, and FIG. 36(b1), FIG. 36(b2) and FIG. Indicates the period in which it remains open. In addition, FIG. 36 (a1) and FIG. 36 (b1) show the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed in response to the first small winning result, and FIG. 36 (a2) and FIG. 36 (b2) 36(a3) and 36(b3) show the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed when the second small win results. Figure 36 (a3) and FIG. This figure shows how the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the case of the first small hit result, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed from timing t1 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 36(a1), from timing t2 to timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36(b1). The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened only once over the timing of t3. The opening duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 in this one opening round is set to 10 seconds as shown in FIG. 35(b). The firing cycle of game balls is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, so this opening duration period is equal to the firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit of winnings. The period is longer than the product of the number of items.

In the case of the second small hit result, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 36(a2), the timing from t2 to the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36(b2). The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once over each of the timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18 to t19. . That is, in the case of the second small winning result, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened is five times. The duration of opening of the special electric winning device 32 in each opening is set to 2 seconds as shown in FIG. 35(b). The firing cycle of game balls is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, so the opening duration of each opening is equal to the firing cycle of the game balls. The period will be shorter than the product of the winning amount and the maximum number of winning prizes. However, the total opening duration of each opening is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of winnings. Further, the total opening duration of each opening is equal to the opening duration of one opening in the opening/closing execution mode in the first small winning result.

In the case of the third small hit result, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed from timing t1 to timing t40 as shown in FIG. 36(a3), from timing t2 to timing t2 as shown in FIG. 36(b3). t21 timing, t22 timing to t23 timing, t24 timing to t25 timing, t26 timing to t27 timing, t28 timing to t29 timing, t30 timing to t31 timing, t32 timing to t33 timing The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once each from timing t34 to timing t35, timing t36 to timing t37, and timing t38 to timing t39. That is, in the case of the third small winning result, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened is 10 times. The opening duration period of the special electric winning device 32 in each opening is set to 1 second as shown in FIG. 35(b). The firing cycle of game balls is 0.6 seconds, and the upper limit number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is 10, so the opening duration of each opening is equal to the firing cycle of the game balls. The period will be shorter than the product of the winning amount and the maximum number of winning prizes. However, the total opening duration of each opening is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of winnings. In addition, the total opening duration of each opening is equal to the opening duration of one opening in the opening/closing execution mode in the first small winning result, and the total opening duration of each opening in the second small winning result. Equal to period.

As mentioned above, in the opening/closing execution mode for each small hit result, the smaller the number of openings, the longer the opening duration of each opening is set. The longer the duration of one opening of the special electric winning device 32 is, the more likely it is that a prize to the special electric winning device 32 will be won. On the other hand, the more times the special electric winning device 32 is opened, the more chances that the special electric winning device 32 will change from the open state to the closed state while the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 will occur. Therefore, it becomes more likely that a prize will be won in the through gate 35. Therefore, in the first small winning result, winning to the special electric winning device 32 is most likely to occur, but winning to the through gate 35 is the least likely to occur, and in the third small winning result, winning to the special electric winning device 32 is the most likely to occur. Although it is difficult, winning to the through gate 35 is most likely to occur, and in the second small winning result, both winning to the special electric winning device 32 and winning to the through gate 35 are moderately likely to occur. As a result, players who expect to win on the special electric winning device 32 will expect the first small winning result, and players who expect to win on the through gate 35 will expect the third small winning result. I will do it. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the targets that players expect. In addition, regardless of whether the first small win result, the second small win result, or the third small win result each has its merits, it is possible to increase the attention of players to each small win result. Become.

In addition, in both the second small winning result and the third small winning result, the special electric prize winning device 32 will be opened multiple times, but the interval period of each opening is the same, 3 seconds. There is. Further, the game ball can reach the predetermined range X on the guide plate section 214 when the period in which the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position passes for one second.

<General purpose electric power control process>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between the open state and the closed state, and a processing configuration for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be explained. First, a processing configuration for switching the second operating port 34 between an open state and a closed state will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the regular electricity control process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the general electric power control process is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, an acquisition process of reservation information on the ordinary figure side is executed (step S1101). In the acquisition process, if a prize has been won to the through gate 35 and the holding information on the general drawing side for the maximum number of pieces has not been acquired in the general drawing holding area 65c, the general drawing random number counter C4 is The numerical information is stored in the general figure holding area 65c. In this case, the reservation information on the general map side is stored in the order of first area 88a → second area 88b → third area 88c → fourth area 88d.

Thereafter, the numerical information of the standard/universal electricity counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S1102), and the general/universal electricity address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out (step S1103). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the general-purpose electricity counter is acquired from the general-purpose electricity address table (step S1104), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1105).

The general purpose electric power counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the steps S1106 to S1110 in the general electric power control process should be executed. In the address table, a start address in a program for executing each process of step S1106 to step S1110 is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the general electric power counter. If the value of the general pattern/universal electricity counter is "0", the process jumps to the normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S1106, and if the value of the general/universal electricity/universal electricity counter is "1", the process jumps to the normal pattern fluctuation start process of step S1107. Jumping to the middle process, if the value of the general figure general electricity counter is "2", jump to the normal figure confirmation process of step S1108, and if the value of the general figure general electricity counter is "3" The routine jumps to the process during normal power opening in step S1109, and when the value of the normal electricity counter is "4", jumps to the process during normal electricity closing in step S1110.

In the general pattern fluctuation start process of step S1106, on the condition that the general pattern side holding information is stored in the general pattern holding area 65c, the general pattern side holding information stored in the general pattern holding area 65c is held. Execute the process of shifting. Specifically, the reservation information on the general drawing side stored in the first area 88a of the general drawing holding area 65c is shifted to the ordinary drawing execution area 89, and then the second area 88b→first area 88a, The reservation information on the general map side is shifted so that the third area 88c→the second area 88b and the fourth area 88d→the third area 88c. Then, a general electricity release lottery process is executed using the hold information of the general electricity grid newly shifted to the execution area 89 for general electricity electricity as a lottery value. In this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery process is constant regardless of the game state, such as whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, there is a probability of 9/10 that the general electricity open state will be won.

However, it is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the general power open state may be higher or lower than this. Further, instead of executing the general electricity release lottery process, a configuration may be adopted in which the general electricity release state occurs reliably once for each piece of general electricity reservation information. In this case, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the normal power open state.

In the ordinary figure fluctuation start process, when the ordinary electricity opening lottery process is executed, a process for starting the variable display of the symbols on the ordinary figure display section 38a is executed. In this case, information about a variable display period for displaying a pattern in a variable manner on the general figure display section 38a is set in a general figure general electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The value set in the general electric power timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed. In this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the variable display period of the variable display of the symbols on the common picture display section 38a is constant regardless of the gaming state, such as whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , specifically set to 5 seconds. Then, when the variable display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display section 38a is started, the value of the ordinary figure and ordinary electricity counter is updated from "0" to "1". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the process during general-purpose figure fluctuation.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period of the variable display of the picture in the ordinary figure display section 38a may be longer or shorter than this. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of variable display periods for the variable display of the symbols on the ordinary figure display section 38a are set, and the variable display period to be executed is determined by lottery. Furthermore, in a configuration in which the general electricity release lottery process is not executed, but the general electricity release state reliably occurs once for each piece of general electricity reservation information, the pattern on the general electricity illustration display section 38a is If the hold information on the power grid side is newly acquired in a situation where the power grid side is not in the open state without a fluctuation display being executed, or in a situation where the hold information on the power grid side is held and stored, the power switch state is changed to the open state. When this is completed, a new utility power release state may be started using the suspension information on the utility map side as an execution trigger. In addition, on the contrary, even if the configuration is such that the utility power open state occurs reliably once for one piece of pending information on the utility symbol side, the variable display of the symbol on the utility symbol display section 38a is executed, A configuration may be adopted in which the normal power open state is started after the variable display of the pattern is executed.

In the process during normal figure variation in step S1107, a process for updating the display of the picture in the normal figure display section 38a is executed. In addition, if the value set in the general-purpose pattern timer counter in the main side RAM 65 in the general-purpose pattern fluctuation start process is "0," the information on the fixed period on the general-purpose pattern side is transferred to the general-purpose pattern in the main-side RAM 65. In addition to setting the general electricity timer counter, the general electricity display unit 38a displays a symbol corresponding to the result of the general electricity opening lottery process that triggered the execution of the current pattern variation display in the general electricity illustration display unit 38a. Execute processing. Then, the value of the general electric power counter is updated from "1" to "2". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose map and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose map determining process.

In the ordinary figure confirmation process in step S1108, if the value of the ordinary figure and ordinary electricity timer counter is "0", the result of the ordinary electricity opening lottery process that triggered the execution of the current symbol fluctuation display time is It is determined whether or not the general electricity open state has been won. If the general electricity open state is not won, the value of the general electricity distribution counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process.

If the general power open state is won, processing for setting the general power open state is executed. Specifically, "3" is set in the normal power disconnection counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The general power release number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of times the general power accessory 34a is opened in the general power release state. Further, numerical information of the opening duration period (specifically, 2 seconds) when the general electric utility object 34a is opened once is set in the general electric utility timer counter. In addition, "10" is set in the general electricity prize counter. Further, output of a drive signal to the drive unit 34b for general electricity is started so that the general electricity accessory 34a is in an open state. The general power winning counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the remaining game balls that can win in the second operating port 34 in the normal power open state, and every time a winning in the second operating port 34 occurs. 1 is subtracted from the value of the general electricity award counter. Then, when the value of the general electricity winning counter becomes "0", the current general electricity release state is ended, regardless of the remaining number of openings of the general electricity accessory 34a and the remaining opening duration of the general electricity accessory 34a at that time. . Thereafter, the value of the general electric power counter is updated from "2" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general utility power control process becomes the general utility power opening process. Here, in this embodiment, as already explained, there is only one type of support mode. Therefore, the number of times the general electric utility object 34a is in the open state in the general electric power open state, the opening duration period when the general electric power accessory 34a is opened once, and the number of times the general electric power accessory 34a is opened to the second operating port 34 in the general electric power open state. The upper limit number of winning game balls is constant regardless of the game state, such as whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress and whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.

In step S1109, during normal electricity release processing, when a win to the second operating port 34 has occurred, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 65. If the value of the general electricity winning counter is ``0'', the value of the general electricity release count counter is cleared to ``0'', the value of the general electricity timer counter is cleared to ``0'', and the general electricity winning counter is cleared to ``0''. By stopping the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b, the utility power utility object 34a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the utility power counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process. In addition, even if the value of the general electricity winning counter is not "0", if the value of the general electricity timer counter is "0", a drive signal is output to the driving unit 34b for general electricity. By stopping this, the utility power accessory 34a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the utility power opening counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the general electric power open count counter is not "0," numerical information of the closing duration of the general electric power accessory 34a is set in the general electric power electric timer counter, and then the value of the general electric power electric utility counter is changed to " Update from ``3'' to ``4''. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general utility grid control process becomes the general electricity closed process. When the value of the general electricity release number counter is ``0'', the value of the general electricity supply counter is cleared to ``0'' without setting a value in the general electricity consumption timer counter. Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process.

In step S1110, during the general power shutdown process, on the condition that the value of the general power power timer counter is "0", the normal power is output by starting the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for the general power power. Numerical information of the open duration period (specifically, 2 seconds) when the electric utility object 34a is opened and the general electric utility object 34a is opened once is set in the general electric utility timer counter. Then, the value of the general electric power counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general utility power control process becomes the general utility power opening process.

By executing the general/universal electric/universal electricity control process as described above, the variable display of the symbols is performed on the general/universal figure display section 38a, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the through gate 35. When the general electricity release state is won in the general electricity release lottery process, the general electricity release state is established in which the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is in the open state. When the power is in the open state and the second operating port 34 is in the open state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second operating port 34, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 34, the second pending information is displayed. is stored in the second special figure holding area 86.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, a processing configuration for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 between the open state and the closed state will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process executed by the main side CPU 63. Note that the special figure special electric control process is executed in step S213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, pending information acquisition processing is executed (step S1201). In the reservation information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If the number of pieces of one hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1302: YES), processing for acquiring first hold information is executed. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a winning to the first operating port 33 has occurred is made by determining whether or not the first operating winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". As already explained, the first operation winning flag is set to "1" in step S315 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the process for acquiring the first pending information, first, a memory card is provided in the main side RAM 65 in order for the main side CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed first pending information stored in the first special figure holding area 85. The value of the first special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S1303). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. Thereby, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c corresponds to the number of first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 85. Thereafter, each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 85, that is, the storage corresponding to the number of reservations added by 1 in step S1303. It is stored in the area (step S1304). Thereafter, the first hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S1305). When the audio emission control device 81 receives the first hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . The symbol display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of pieces of first reservation information stored in the first special symbol reservation area 85, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the first reservation command. By receiving the information, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of pieces of first pending information by one. Note that when a game round triggered by the first pending information is started, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the fact that the number of pieces of the first pending information is decreased by one.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, if a negative determination is made in step S1302, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, a winning has occurred in the second operating port 34 (step S1306: YES). ), and further, on the condition that the number of second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1307: YES), a process for acquiring the second reservation information is performed. Execute. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the second operating port 34 is made by determining whether or not the second operating winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". As already explained, the second operation winning flag is set to "1" in step S319 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0".

In the process for acquiring the second pending information, first, a memory card is provided in the main side RAM 65 in order for the main side CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed second pending information stored in the second special figure holding area 86. The value of the second special figure reservation counter is incremented by 1 (step S1308). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure reservation counter. Thereby, the display contents of the second special figure holding display section 37d correspond to the number of second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 86. After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 86, that is, the storage corresponding to the number of reservation memories added by 1 in step S1308. It is stored in the area (step S1309). Thereafter, a second hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S1310). When the audio emission control device 81 receives the second hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . The symbol display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of pieces of second reservation information stored in the second special symbol reservation area 86, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the second reservation command. By receiving the information, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of pieces of second pending information by one. Note that when a game round triggered by the second pending information is started, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the fact that the number of pieces of the second pending information is decreased by one.

After executing the reservation information acquisition process (step S1201), the numerical information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read out (step S1202), and the special figure special electric line address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read out. Read out (step S1203). Then, a start address corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure/special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure/special electric line address table (step S1204), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S1205).

The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the processes from step S1206 to step S1212 in the special figure special electric line control process should be executed, and it is used in the special figure special electric line address table. is set as a start address in the program for executing each process from step S1206 to step S1212 in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter. When the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "0", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S1206, and when the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "1", the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation process of step S1207. If the value of the special figure special electric line counter is ``2'', the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process of step S1208, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is ``3'', the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process of step S1209. Jump to the start process, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "4", jump to the special electric line opening process of step S1210, and if the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "5", jump to the special electric line opening process of step S1211. The program jumps to the special train closing process, and if the value of the special map special train counter is "6", jumps to the special train end process of step S1212. Each process from step S1206 to step S1212 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol fluctuation start process in step S1206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation start process is not executed in a situation where a game round has already been executed and a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, if the second reserve information is not stored in the second special figure reserve area 86 and the first reserve information is stored in the first special figure reserve area 85 (step S1401: YES, step S1402: NO), the first data setting process is executed (step S1403). In the first data setting process, the data stored in the first area 85a of the first special figure holding area 85 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 85 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 85a to 85d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 85a, and also clears the data in the second area 85b→ Data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area 85a, third area 85c→second area 85b, fourth area 85d→third area 85c. Thereafter, the value of the first special figure pending counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. Thereby, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first reservation information is decreased by one. In addition, in the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 85 has decreased by one is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio light emission control device 81 receives the first decrease command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . As already explained, the symbol display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of pieces of the first reservation information stored in the first special symbol reservation area 85, and the display control device 82 displays the first reduction command. By receiving the command corresponding to , the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the fact that the number of pieces of first pending information has decreased by one.

On the other hand, if the second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 (step S1401 and step S1402: YES), the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is the first reservation information. Even if it is stored in the 1 special figure holding area 85, the second data setting process is executed (step S1404). In the second data setting process, the data stored in the first area 86a of the second special figure holding area 86 is moved to the special figure execution area 87. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 86 is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 86a to 86d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 86a, and also clears the data in the second area 86b→ Data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area 86a, third area 86c→second area 86b, fourth area 86d→third area 86c. Thereafter, the value of the second special figure reservation counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. Thereby, the display contents of the second special figure reservation display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 are changed to the contents in which the second reservation information is decreased by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the second reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 86 has decreased by one is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81. When the audio emission control device 81 receives the second decrease command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . As already explained, the symbol display device 41 displays an image to notify the number of pieces of the second reservation information stored in the second special symbol reservation area 86, and the display control device 82 displays the second reduction command. By receiving the command corresponding to , the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the fact that the number of pieces of second pending information has decreased by one.

Here, if the second reservation information is stored as described above, even if the first reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information is stored, the second reservation information is for special drawings. The target is to be shifted to the execution area 87. As a result, the second pending information is given priority over the first pending information as a target for starting a game round.

When the process of step S1403 or step S1404 is executed, a validity determination process is executed (step S1405). In the win/fail determination process, if the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the starting target of the game round is the first pending information, the low probability win/fail table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 9(a)) is stored in the main side ROM 64. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode and the starting target of the game round is the first pending information, the high probability win/fail table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 9(b)) is read from the main side ROM 64. , if the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and the starting target of the game round is the second pending information, the low probability win/fail table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 9(c)) is read from the main side ROM 64, and the win/fail table is read out from the main side ROM 64. If the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the target for starting the game round is the second pending information, the high probability win/fail table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 9(d)) is read from the main side ROM 64. After reading the win/fail table, read the win/fail judgment information, that is, the numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1, from the pending information stored in the special figure execution area 87, and the read numerical information is used as the win/fail table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result. In addition, if the starting target of the current game round is the second pending information, if it does not match the numerical information set as the jackpot result, the first small win result and the second small win result in the above win/fail table. It is determined whether any of the numerical information set for each of the results and the third small winning result matches the information for the above-mentioned validity determination.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S1406: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S1407). In the distribution determination process, if the target for starting the game round is the first pending information, the distribution table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 10(a)) is read from the main side ROM 64, and the target for starting the game round is read from the main side ROM 64. 2 pending information, the distribution table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 10(b)) is read from the main side ROM 64. After reading the distribution table, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, is read from the pending information stored in the execution area 87 for special symbols, and the above distribution table is referred to. By doing so, it is specified which type of jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

After executing the distribution determination process, a flag in the main side RAM 65 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process is set to "1" (step S1408). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S1409). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b, which are the starting targets for the current game round, is stored in the main side ROM 64 in advance for jackpot results. It is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S1409, information on the stop mode of the symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S1408 is stored in the main side RAM 65. Note that the pattern stopping manner may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. The method of selecting a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but for example, a structure may be adopted in which a stop result is selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is not a jackpot result but one of the small win results (step S1406: NO, step S1410: YES), the main side RAM 65 corresponds to the type of small win result specified in the above-mentioned right/fail determination process. The flag is set to "1" (step S1411). After that, information on the stopping mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display section 37b, which is the start target of the current game round, is stored in the stopping result table for small winning results stored in advance in the main side ROM 64. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 65. In this stop result table for small hit results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the second special figure display section 37b are set to be different for each type of small win result, and in step S1412 , information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of small hit result specified in step S1411 is stored in the main side RAM 65. Note that the pattern stopping mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each small win result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for at least some of the small win results. . The method of selecting a stop result for a small win result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a stop result is selected according to the value of the winning random number counter C1. Further, the information on the pattern mode selected in step S1412 is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result.

If the result of the win/fail determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S1410: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S1413). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in advance in the main side ROM 64 as a winning result. The specified information is stored in the main side RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result, and is further different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result. One type is common to the special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b.

When the process in step S1409, step S1412, or step S1413 is executed, a process for specifying a variable display period is executed (step S1414). In the specific processing, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not a ready-to-win effect will occur on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, if any jackpot result occurs in the current game round, it is determined that a reach effect occurs. Further, if any small winning result occurs in the current game round, it is determined that the reach effect does not occur. In addition, if both a jackpot result and a small win result do not occur in this game round, the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information stored in the execution area 87 for special symbols will be used to determine the reach occurrence. If the numerical information corresponds, it is determined that a reach effect will occur, and if the numerical information does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach effect will not occur.

If it is determined that a reach effect will occur, refer to the reach occurrence table stored in the main side ROM 64, obtain information on the variable display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current change type counter CS, and The obtained information on the variable display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. In addition, if it is determined that a reach effect will not occur, refer to the reach non-occurrence table stored in the main side ROM 64 and display the information of the fluctuation display period corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS. get. In this case, each variable display period is set so that the variable display period when a reach effect occurs is longer than the variable display period when a reach effect does not occur. Then, the obtained information on the variable display period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. The value set in the special figure special electric timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is executed.

The variable display period when no reach occurs is set so that the average period becomes shorter as the number of reservation information stored in the first special symbol reservation area 85 or the second special symbol reservation area 86 increases. In addition, in a situation where the winning/failure lottery mode is a high probability mode, the pending information stored in the first special drawing holding area 85 or the second special drawing holding area 86 is more important than in a situation where the winning/failure drawing mode is a low probability mode. The variable display period when no reach occurs is set so that a shorter variable display period is more likely to be selected than when the numbers are the same.

In addition, the variable display period selected when the result is a small win may be shorter than the variable display period selected when the result is a jackpot, and the variable display period selected when the result is a small win. It may be configured to be shorter than the average value of the variable display period selected when the average value is a jackpot result. In this case, when the second pending information becomes the target for starting a game round and a small winning result occurs, it is possible to speed up the speed at which the game round is completed.

Here, the maximum variable display period selected when the second pending information becomes the start target of a game round in a situation where the winning/losing lottery mode is a low probability mode is The period is set to be less than or equal to the maximum variable display period selected when the first pending information is targeted for the start of a game round. In addition, in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the average period of the variable display period selected when the second pending information becomes the target for starting a game round and there is no jackpot result is the win/fail lottery mode. This is set to a period that is less than or equal to the average period of the variable display period that is selected when the first pending information becomes the target for starting a game round and there is no jackpot result in a situation where is in the low probability mode. This makes it possible to prevent the play rate from deteriorating even if the second pending information becomes the starting target for a game session in a low probability mode. However, this is not limited to this, and the variable display that is selected when the second pending information becomes the target for starting a game round in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode and there is no jackpot result. The average period of the period is the average period of the variable display period that is selected when the first pending information becomes the target for starting a game round and there is no jackpot result in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. A configuration may be adopted in which they are set to be the same or substantially the same. In this case, "substantially the same" means that although the average periods are actually different, the player cannot recognize the difference.

In addition, in a situation where the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the average period of the variable display period selected when the second pending information becomes the target for starting a game round and there is no jackpot result is the win/fail lottery mode. The period is set to be shorter than the average period of the variable display period selected when the first hold information becomes the target for starting a game round in a situation where the game is in the high probability mode and there is no jackpot result. As a result, when the second pending information is the starting target for a gaming session in a high probability mode, the first pending information becomes the starting target for a gaming session in a high probability mode. This makes it possible to increase the play rate more than the game play rate in the case where the number of games is increased.

After executing the process of specifying the variable display period, the variable command and type command corresponding to the game round to be started this time are transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S1415). The variation command includes information on the variation display period specified in step S1414, and also indicates which of the first special figure display section 37a and second special figure display section 37b the game round to be started is. Contains information indicating whether it is compatible. Furthermore, the variation command includes information as to whether or not to execute the reach effect. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result, and if it corresponds to a jackpot result, which type of jackpot result it is. Contains information indicating whether In addition, the type command includes information as to whether or not the game round to be started this time corresponds to the small winning result, and if it corresponds to the small winning result, which type of Information indicating whether the result is a small win is included.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols is started on the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, which are the display sections targeted for the start of the current game round (step S1416). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1417). Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is "0," by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter corresponds to the process during special figure fluctuation (step S1207) It becomes "1".

In addition, when the audio emission control device 81 receives the variation command and the type command, it executes processing for determining the content of execution of the game repeat performance corresponding to these commands. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed according to the table corresponding to the processing result. As a result, the light emitting effect in the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output effect in the speaker section 54 are executed over the variable display period of the current game round. Further, the audio emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the content of execution of the game replay effect determined this time to the display control device 82. By receiving the command, the display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the table corresponding to the command. As a result, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed over the variable display period of the current game round.

In this case, if the current game round has a 16R high probability result, a combination of "7" symbols will be stopped and displayed on any active line. Also, if this game round has a 2R high-accuracy result, 4R high-accuracy result, 6R high-accuracy result, or 10R high-accuracy result, the same odd number other than the "7" symbol on any active line The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, if the current game round has a 2R low-probability result, 4R low-probability result, 6R low-probability result, 10R low-probability result, or 16R low-probability result, the same even number symbol is placed on any active line. The combination will be stopped and displayed. In addition, if the current game round is any of the 1st small winning result, 2nd small winning result, or 3rd small winning result, it is not a combination of the same symbols on any active line and a combination of reach symbols. A predetermined symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") that is not displayed is stopped and displayed. In this way, a predetermined symbol combination that is common in the game replay on the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed regardless of the first small winning result, the second small winning result, or the third small winning result. By doing this, it is possible to clearly indicate the occurrence of a small win result while making it difficult to understand which of the first small win result, second small win result, or third small win result corresponds to. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the opening/closing execution mode that occurs when a small win results. Moreover, in the structure in which the symbol display device 41 stops displaying a predetermined symbol combination that is common to any of the first small win result, second small win result, and third small win result, In the 2 special figure display section 37b, the symbols corresponding to the types of small winning results are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the manager of the gaming hall can specify which type of small winning result has occurred simply by visually checking the second special figure display section 37b. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol display device 41 may also be configured to display a stop result corresponding to the type of small hit result.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation process executed in step S1207 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 38) will be explained.

When the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is 1 or more and the variable display period of the current game round has not elapsed, the display of the special figure display parts 37a and 37b that is the target of execution of the current game round. If it is time to update the content, data settings are made to update the display content of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b. As a result, the display contents of the pictures on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents of the next order.

The manner in which the fluctuating display of symbols in the special figure display sections 37a and 37b starts and the manner in which the fluctuating display of symbols is updated are performed in a constant manner regardless of the validity determination result and the distribution determination result, and the symbol display device Regardless of the contents of the game replay in 41, the game is performed in a fixed manner. For example, when a predetermined update timing occurs a plurality of times, the display content of the picture completes one cycle, and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed, and when a variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order of display is being performed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round will be displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b.

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Thereafter, the information on the stop mode of the symbols on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b stored in the main side RAM 65 at the start of the game round is read out. As a result, the variable display of the symbols is stopped in a state where the symbols corresponding to the game results of the current game round are displayed on the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b to be controlled. Thereafter, information on the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Thereby, measurement of the final stop period is started. Thereafter, add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter. Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the process during special figure fluctuation is executed is "1," by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter corresponds to the process during special figure confirmation (step S1208) It becomes "2".

Note that when the audio emission control device 81 receives the final stop command, it transmits a command corresponding to the final stop command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the command, the symbol combination corresponding to the stop result of the current game round is displayed in a fixed manner on the symbol display device 41 over the final stop period.

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, the special figure confirmation process executed in step S1208 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

When the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" and the final stop period has passed (step S1501: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result ( Step S1502: YES), add 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1503). The value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special figure confirmation process is executed is "2", so by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "3" corresponding to the special electric line start process (step S1209). ”. On the other hand, if the game result of the current game round is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S1502: NO), the value of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1504). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1206).

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process executed in step S1209 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

If it is before the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (step S1601: YES), and if the current game result is a jackpot result, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter, and if the current game result is a small winning result, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the small winning result (specifically 2 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. Set (step S1602). Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S1603). As a result, a performance corresponding to the opening period is performed on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54.

If it is after the start of the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode (step S1601: NO), the value of the special map special electric timer counter is "0", that is, the opening period has elapsed (step S1604: YES), a process for setting the number of openings and closings is executed (step S1605). In this case, if the current gaming result is a 2R low probability result or a 2R high probability result, the opening/closing counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "2", and the current gaming result is a 4R low probability result or a 4R high probability result. If the result is a certain result, set the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 to "4", and if the current game result is a 6R low certainty result or a 6R high certainty result, set "6" to the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65. However, if the current game result is a 10R low-probability result or a 10R high-probability result, "10" is set in the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 65, and even if the current game result is a 16R low-probability result or a 16R high-probability result, In this case, the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "16". Also, if the current game result is the first small winning result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", and if the current gaming result is the second small winning result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". "5" is set to "5", and if the current game result is the third small winning result, "10" is set to the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65. The opening/closing number counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of opening/closing times of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode.

Thereafter, a process for setting an open duration period is executed (step S1606). In this setting process, if the current game result is any of the jackpot results, information on the open duration period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. In addition, in the setting process, if the current game result is the first small winning result, information on the opening duration period for the first small winning result (specifically 10 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. However, if the current game result is the second small winning result, set the information on the opening duration for the second small winning result (specifically, 2 seconds) in the special figure special electric timer counter, and If the result is the third small winning result, information on the opening duration period (specifically, 1 second) for the third small winning result is set in the special figure special electric timer counter.

Thereafter, a process for setting the upper limit number of prizes to be won is executed (step S1607). In this setting process, the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "10" regardless of whether the current game result is a jackpot result or a small win result. The prize winning counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of winning prizes.

Thereafter, special electric power release setting processing is executed (step S1608). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is placed in an open state. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 32 becomes in an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S1609). When the special train start process is executed, the value of the special train special train counter is "3", so by adding 1, the value of the special train special train counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special train opening process (step S1210). becomes.

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process executed in step S1210 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

When the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the opening continuation period has elapsed (step S1701: YES), the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1702). After that, information on the interval period (specifically, 3 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (step S1703). Further, a closing setting process for special electricity is executed (step S1704). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed to cause the special electric prize winning device 32 to be in a closed state. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 32 enters the closed state. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1705). Since the value of the special figure special electric line counter when the special electric line opening process is executed is "4," by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "5" corresponding to the special electric line closing process (step S1211). ”.

If the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0", that is, if the opening continuation period has not elapsed (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the special electric prize winning device 32 ( Step S1706). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32 is made by determining whether or not the special electric winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". As already explained, the special electric winning flag is set to "1" in step S311 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, the special electric winning flag is cleared to "0".

If a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32 (step S1706: YES), the value of the winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S1707). If the value of the prize winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1708: YES), if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is any jackpot result (step S1709: NO), the processes of steps S1702 to S1705 already described are executed. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step S1708: YES) and the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the small winning results (step S1709 : YES), after clearing the value of the opening/closing frequency counter of the main side RAM 65 to "0" (step S1710), the processes of steps S1704 to S1705 already described are executed.

<Processing during special train closure>
Next, the special train closed process executed in step S1211 of the special train special train control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

If the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the small winning results and a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32 (step S1801: YES), the winning in the main side RAM 65 The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1802). The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1801 is when the game ball that entered the special electric winning device 32 immediately before the special electric winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state is detected by the special electric detecting sensor 45a. . If the value of the prize winning counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1803: YES), the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1804).

In the special train closing process, if the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1805: NO), by determining whether the value of the special map special train timer counter is "0", It is determined whether the interval period has elapsed (step S1806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S1806: YES), the maximum number of prizes won is Setting processing is executed (step S1808). In this setting process, the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is set to "10".

If a negative determination is made in step S1807, or if the process in step S1808 is executed, a process for setting an open duration period is executed (step S1809). In this setting process, if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result, information on the opening duration of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is sent to the special figure special electric timer counter. Set to . In addition, in the setting process, if the current game result is the second small win result, information on the opening duration period for the second small win result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. However, if the current game result is the third small winning result, information on the opening duration period (specifically, 1 second) for the third small winning result is set in the special figure special electric timer counter.

Thereafter, special electric power release setting processing is executed (step S1810). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is placed in an open state. As a result, the special electric prize winning device 32 becomes in an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1811). Since the value of the special train special electric line counter is "5" when the special train closed process is executed, by subtracting 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes "4", which corresponds to the special electric line open process (step S1210). ”.

On the other hand, if the value of the opening/closing frequency counter of the main side RAM 65 is "0" (step S1805: YES), an ending period setting process is executed (step S1812). In this case, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a jackpot result, information corresponding to the ending period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the special map special electric timer counter. However, if the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small hit result, information corresponding to the ending period (specifically 2 seconds) corresponding to the small win result is sent to the special map special electric timer counter. set. After that, an ending command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S1813). As a result, a performance corresponding to the ending period is performed on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1814). When the special train closing process is executed, the value of the special train special train counter is "5", so by adding 1, the value of the special train special train counter becomes "6", which corresponds to the special train closing process (step S1212). becomes.

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train termination process executed in step S1212 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

If the value of the special map special electric timer counter is "0", that is, if the ending period has elapsed (step S1901: YES), the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the high probability results. If so (steps S1902 and S1903: YES), a high probability flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S1904). The high probability flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and when the value of the high probability flag is "1", the It is a probability mode, and when the value of the high probability flag is "0", it is a low probability mode. Therefore, by executing the process of step S1904, the winning lottery mode after the current opening/closing execution mode ends becomes a high probability mode. Also, if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the low probability results (step S1902: YES, step S1903: NO), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0". (Step S1905). As a result, the win/fail lottery mode after the current opening/closing execution mode ends becomes a low probability mode.

On the other hand, if the game result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is any small winning result (step S1902: NO), neither the processing in step S1904 nor step S1905 is executed. As a result, even if the game result is one of the small wins and the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the win/fail lottery mode does not change before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, if the process of step S1904 is executed, or if the process of step S1905 is executed, a clear process is executed (step S1906). In the clearing process, various flags and various counters used in the current game round and the current opening/closing execution mode are cleared to "0". However, the high probability flag in the main side RAM 65 is excluded from this "0" clearing target. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S1907). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter becomes "0" corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1206).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34, the game ball is paid out, so the player can choose either of these ball entry ports. The player plays the game while hoping that the game ball will land in the ball. In this configuration, the game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section). If this occurs, the corresponding history information will be stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. This makes it possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section or the frequency of ball entry, and this managed information can be used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters each history target ball entry section. Furthermore, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information.

All the ball entry units that eject game balls from the gaming area PA are subject to storage processing of historical information and are subject to management using historical information. This makes it possible to manage the frequency of ball entry for any history target ball entry section using history information. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entry section to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information that is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry section that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it becomes possible to grasp in detail the history of the entry of game balls into the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 contains not only history information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the history target ball entry section, but also history information indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and whether the game ball is in the high probability mode. History information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not, and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open or not are stored. This makes it possible to distinguish between these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device that is a device external to the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to read the history information with the reading device and use the read history information to analyze how the game ball enters the history target ball entry section.

The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 can read the program from the main ROM 64. This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal or not. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is outputted to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside. This makes it possible to output history information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

It is specified whether the information to be outputted from the reading terminal 102 is a program or history information, and the information corresponding to the identification result is outputted to the outside through the reading terminal 102. As a result, in a configuration in which historical information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting a program, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the historical information. The specified information is output externally. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the reading terminal 102 is used also, it is possible to read only necessary information.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the selection of information to be outputted from the outside from becoming complicated.

The MPU 62 includes a main ROM 64 that stores programs in advance, and includes a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to consolidate the signal paths to the reading terminal 102 within the MPU 62. Therefore, while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

The main side CPU 63 executes processing for causing a game ball to be paid out based on the entry of a game ball into any one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. A management side CPU 112 is provided separately from the management side CPU 112, and a process for storing history information in the history memory 117 is executed by the management side CPU 112. This makes it possible to manage the manner in which game balls enter each history target ball entry section while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing excessively.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

The main CPU 63 transmits information corresponding to the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal path corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a to 122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each buffer 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to do so.

The main CPU 63 outputs information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, information corresponding to whether the high probability mode is in progress, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened. , are transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the type of information corresponding to each of these situations corresponds to each buffer 122h to 122j (that is, each signal path), simplifying the configuration for distinguishing each type of information in the management CPU 112. becomes possible.

The main CPU 63 transmits to the management CPU 112 correspondence relationship information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . This allows the management IC 66 to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target ball entry area in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry area. It becomes possible to do so.

Correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry section. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting correspondence information is provided.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, each time the main CPU 63 transmits information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. There is no need to provide it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information on the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

Information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponding to the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is being Thereby, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the management IC 66.

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each piece of history information includes correspondence relationship information indicating the type of the history target ball entry section that corresponds to the history information. This makes it possible to specify how the game ball enters each history target ball entry section using the read history information.

In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (1st to 8th, 11th to 18th, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of calculations using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding history information corresponding to a situation where the front door frame 14 is open. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to each of the opening/closing execution mode situation and the high probability mode situation are calculated. This allows the manager of the game hall and the like to understand the manner in which game balls enter the game according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing a clearing process for the history memory 117. As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes the subject of storage in the history memory 117, and history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it less likely to occur.

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, when reading out various parameters and analyzing the manner in which the game ball enters the gaming area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the historical information that is the basis for calculating the various parameters.

The management CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and output instruction information is sent from the main CPU 63, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters. , various parameters resulting from the calculation are outputted to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to output various parameters to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process executed by the main CPU 63 at the time of starting the supply of operating power, and the reading device is electrically connected. is specified, output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, various types of Parameter calculation and external output of various parameters as a result of the calculation are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, and the processing load on the management IC 66 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce this.

In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a corresponding external output is performed through the external terminal board 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . As a result, by using the information outputted externally through the external terminal board 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the balls can be easily grasped, and the history By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entry section and the frequency of ball entry.

The through gate 35 is provided at a position where entry of game balls is restricted in a gaming state other than the opening/closing execution mode, and allows entry of game balls in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, by shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it is not only possible to enter the game ball into the fourth discharge passage section 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also to allow the game ball to enter the through gate 35. Become. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the benefit of shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

When a game ball enters the through gate 35, the holding information on the regular game side is acquired, and when the holding information on the regular game side is acquired, the second operating port 34 is in an open state with a high probability. becomes. When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, either a jackpot result or a small win result occurs, and the opening/closing execution mode occurs. In other words, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the opening/closing execution mode can occur again. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode occurs continuously, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The opening/closing execution mode may occur based on the game ball entering the first operating port 33, where the game ball may enter the through gate 35 regardless of the game ball entering the through gate 35. Then, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs as described above, the game ball can enter the through gate 35, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35, the opening/closing execution mode can occur again. In this case, in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, the player expects the opening/closing execution mode to be started based on the entry of the game ball into the first operation port 33, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the through gate 35 It is expected that the opening/closing execution mode will occur continuously based on the entry of the game ball into the opening/closing execution mode.

The probability that the open/close execution mode will occur when a game ball enters the through gate 35 is higher than the probability that the open/close execution mode will occur when a game ball enters the first operating port 33. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for the game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The expected value at which the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the game ball enters the through gate 35 and the reservation information on the regular figure side is acquired does not vary depending on the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the expected value is varied depending on the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not vary depending on the gaming state, it becomes difficult to add modulation to the game. On the other hand, as described above, since the configuration allows the game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to give modulation to the opportunity to acquire the reservation information on the general game side. As a result, it becomes possible to give the game more variety.

When the game ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball can enter the second operating port 34, and when the game ball enters the second operating port 34, the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered. Occur. As a result, in order to continuously generate the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes necessary to cause a game ball to enter the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode, and then to enter the game ball into the second operating port 34. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty regarding the successive occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is increased, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A special electric winning device 32, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35 are provided at a position where a game ball flowing down or flowing down the right side area PA3 can enter. As a result, by rotating the firing operation device 28 with the maximum operation amount so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, a prize can be won in the special electric winning device 32, a prize can be won in the second operating port 34, and a through hole can be won. It becomes possible to aim for winning at Gate 35 all at once.

This configuration allows game balls to enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 switches from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the opening/closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, a through gate 35 is provided at a position where game balls can enter at the timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. As a result, just by setting the positional relationship of the through gate 35 with respect to the special electric winning device 32 as described above, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the through gate 35. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can check not only whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage section 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also whether the game ball is placed on the guide plate section 214. Attention should be paid to whether or not the guide plate 214 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other in the opening/closing execution mode, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

An opportunity for a game ball to enter the through gate 35 occurs at the timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state but also when it is switched to the closed state.

The guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is formed so that the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate part 214. When the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a state where the game ball is placed in a predetermined range X, which is a part of the guide plate section 214, the through gate 35 It is located at a position where the ball can enter the ball by falling downward. In this case, in order for a game ball to enter the through gate 35, in a situation where the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, the game ball must not only be placed on the guide plate portion 214, but also the game ball on which the game ball is placed. It is necessary for the opening/closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing when the is within the predetermined range X. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guide plate section 214 and the timing of switching the state of the opening/closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode. becomes.

A guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32 to guide the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202. A predetermined range X, which is a range in which a game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the guide plate portion 214, is set to be biased toward the left end side of the opening/closing member 202. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the through gate 35, the opening/closing member 202 needs to move from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down on the guide plate section 214. be. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate section 214, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the special electric winning device 32, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists on the left side of the predetermined range are doing. As a result, game balls that are placed on the guide plate portion 214 but do not reach the entrance portion 45b enter the through gate 35. Therefore, the player's feeling of disadvantage when the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 does not win in the special electric winning device 32 is changed into a sense of benefit when winning in the through gate 35 occurs. becomes possible.

For example, the jackpot results include a 2R high-accuracy result and a 16R high-accuracy result, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 2R high-accuracy result and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 16R high-accuracy result. The ease with which game balls enter the through gate 35 differs depending on the mode. As a result, players who expect a game ball to enter the through gate 35 will expect an opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball will easily enter the through gate 35, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In a configuration in which a game ball can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 is opened or closed, for example, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 2R high accuracy result and the 16R high accuracy result. The number of times the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed is different between the opening and closing execution mode triggered by this. As a result, the expected value of the game ball entering the through gate 35 becomes higher in the opening/closing execution mode in which the expected value of the game ball entering the special electric winning device 32 becomes higher. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed many times.

When a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is possible not only to have a jackpot result but also a small win result, and the probability of a small win result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result. Thereby, by causing the game ball to enter the second operating port 34, the opening/closing execution mode is more likely to occur. In this case, the ball can enter the through gate 35 in a predetermined situation, which triggers the opening of the second operating port 34. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the second operating port 34 can expect a predetermined situation to occur, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The predetermined situation is a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. As a result, as described above, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs once, it becomes possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode occurs continuously, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the low probability mode, the average period of the variable display period of the game rounds that are executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second operating port 34 and which does not result in a jackpot is equal to It is the same, approximately the same, or less than the average period of the variable display period of the game times that are executed based on the entry of the game ball into the game and do not result in a jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent the rate of play for the former game from being extremely poor compared to the rate for the latter game. However, if this configuration is provided and a configuration is provided in which the frequency with which the second operating port 34 is opened in response to the entry of a game ball into the through gate 35 is constant regardless of the gaming state, the low probability mode It is assumed that a game is played with the aim of entering the game ball into the second operating port 34. On the other hand, if the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, the game ball cannot enter the through gate 35. Therefore, in the low probability mode, it is possible to play a game aiming at the entry of the game ball into the first operating port 33.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 in order to cause the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. 2 signals are inputted, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is inputted to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, and the output instruction signal is inputted to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. Although the configuration is such that the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, the buffers to which these signals are input are different in this embodiment. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the 13th buffer 122m as an opening/closing execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the 14th buffer 122n as a high probability mode signal. The signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

An opening/closing execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, a high probability mode signal is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and a sixteenth buffer 122m receives an opening/closing execution mode signal. It was decided at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 inputs the output instruction signal to the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each one is input. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the recognition process of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 11) as in the first embodiment.

First, the recognition output counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l whose signal types are to be recognized (step S2001). After that, output processing of an identification start signal is executed (step S2002). In the output processing, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the 13th buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the 14th buffer 122n are determined. By setting it to HI level, output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Thereafter, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the output counter for recognition in the main side RAM 65 is read from the main side ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in the output number counter provided in the main side RAM 65 ( Step S2003). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of outputs of the type identification signal by the main CPU 63.

In this embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to 12th buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal is determined. The type identification signal is output the same number of times as . The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal has been received for each of the first buffer 122a to 122l, in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . In other words, the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entering section corresponding to the type of signal.

In step S2003, if the value of the recognition output counter is one of "12", "11", and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operating port 34 is set in the output number counter. In addition, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "6", even if a game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the payout of the game ball is not executed, so the output number counter Set "0" to "0". Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is one of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball entry part does not exist and is blank, so the output number counter is set to "0".

Thereafter, output processing of a start trigger signal is executed (step S2004). In the output process, output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is not "0" (step S2005: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S2003, The process advances to step S2006. In step S2006, output processing of the type identification signal is executed. In the output process, output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

After that, the value of the output number counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S2007), and it is determined whether the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2008). If the value of the output count counter is 1 or more (step S2008: NO), the process returns to step S2006.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S2009). In the output process, output of the termination trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S2010), and it is determined whether the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2011). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S2011: NO), the process returns to step S2003 and executes processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtraction by 1. do.

On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is "0" (step S2011: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S2012). In the output processing, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the opening/closing execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high probability mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n are determined. By setting it to HI level, output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S2101: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S2102). Thereafter, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the process advances to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. If the type identification signal is being received (step S2104: YES), the value of the reception frequency counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2105). The reception frequency counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S2103.

If a negative determination is made in step S2104, or if the process in step S2105 is executed, it is determined whether a termination trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2106). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S2106: NO), the process returns to step S2104, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S2106: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S2107). In the correspondence setting process, a setting is made in the reception frequency counter in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Store the value that has been set. In this case, "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set in the first correspondence area 123a, second correspondence area 123b, and third correspondence area 123c, and "10" corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning hole 31 is set, and in the fourth correspondence area 123d. is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operating port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relationship “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 is set in the area 123f. Further, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 (step S2108).

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, or if the process in step S2108 is executed, it is determined whether or not the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2109). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S2109: NO), the process returns to step S2103, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S2103: YES), the processing from step S2104 onward is performed. Execute. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has been completed (step S2109: YES), the history setting process of step S2110 and the external output process of step S2111 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 49 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. 49(a) shows a period when the output state of the first signal is at HI level, FIG. 49(b) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level, and FIG. 49(c) shows a period when the output state of the second signal is at HI level. ) shows the period when the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 49(d) shows the period when the output state of the signal during opening/closing execution mode is at HI level, and FIG. 49(e) shows the period when the output state of the signal is at HI level. FIG. 49(f) shows the period during which the output state of the signal is at HI level during the high probability mode, and FIG. 49(g) shows the timing when the value of the reception counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 49(h) shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the relationship is executed. The timing at which the correspondence relationship setting process (step S2107) is executed by the side CPU 112 is shown.

By starting the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112, at the timing t1, the first signal , the output states of the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high probability mode signal are changed from LOW level to HI level. As a result, output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2101 of the management process (FIG. 48), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 49(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t3 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 49(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level from the timing t5 to the timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management CPU 112 once. In this case, at timing t6, the value of the reception count counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 49(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 49(c) from timing t8 to timing t10. As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t9, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 49(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "1" is stored as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t11 to timing t12, as shown in FIG. 49(a). As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 49(b), the second The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, each type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, the value of the reception number counter in the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 49(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27, as shown in FIG. 49(c). As a result, the end trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, at timing t26, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 49(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, "10" is stored as the correspondence relationship information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the current setting target in the correspondence relationship memory 116. ” information is stored.

After that, at timing t28, as shown in FIGS. 49(c), 49(d), and 49(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are at the LOW level. to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the high probability mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S2109 of the management process (FIG. 48), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 49(f).

In addition, in this embodiment, since information on the number of prize balls is stored as correspondence relationship information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize ball corresponding to the entered ball part that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number of objects is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are multiple types of ball entry parts with the same number of prize balls, it is not possible to distinguish between the ball entry parts in the history information. Specifically, since both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 have one prize ball, it is difficult to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls for the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 may be made different. This makes it possible to distinguish between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 in the historical information even in a configuration in which historical information is stored as in the second embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, in step S801 of the history setting process, the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 is set to "15". As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to confirmation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal but also the information corresponding to whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the information corresponding to whether the high probability mode is in progress, and the front door frame Regarding the information corresponding to whether or not 14 is open, the management CPU 112 can identify that the signal path corresponds to this information without receiving the correspondence information from the main CPU 63. ing. In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is information that requires the main CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a to 118g from the management CPU 112. Become. When the correspondence relationship information is to be recognized by the management side CPU 112, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. is output to. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the timing at which calculations of various parameters using history information are executed. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are similar to those in the first embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is also provided with a memory 131 for calculation results. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

The trigger for calculating various parameters occurs before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. This makes it possible to vary the timing at which various parameters are calculated and the timing at which they are externally output to the reading device, making it possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, since a calculation result memory 131 is provided to store the calculation results of various parameters, it is possible to store not only various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also various parameters for multiple calculation triggers at once. It is possible to remember it. This makes it possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation occasion.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. 2 signals are inputted, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning a prize opening detection sensor 44a is inputted to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is inputted to the fourth buffer 122d. A signal is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. The sixth signal is inputted, the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is inputted to the eighth buffer 122h, and the ninth signal is inputted to the seventh buffer 122g. A signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 in order to provide the management CPU 112 with an opportunity to calculate various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the 15th buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, similar to the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to these 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p is inputted without receiving the information. On the other hand, what types of signals are input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by instructions from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started.

Next, a processing configuration for allowing the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters in response to the occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing power outage information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the power outage information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

In the power outage information storage process, if a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board 67 (step S2201: YES), output processing of a calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2202). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. Thereafter, in step S2203, after executing a power outage process, an infinite loop is created and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power outage process, the power outage flag in the main RAM 65 is set to "1", a checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the power outage response process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 22), and in the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the process is executed in step S607. The history setting process in step S608, the external output process in step S608, and the power outage response process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power outage response process, if the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2301: YES), in steps S2302 to S2306, the external output in the first embodiment is Similarly to steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 28), calculate the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, and second operating port 34. . Further, in step S2307, similarly to step S1007 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of entering balls of each type in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2308, various parameters are calculated similarly to step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and in step S2309, the external output processing in the first embodiment is performed. Similar to step S1009 of the process (FIG. 28), the total time is calculated. Then, information on the calculation result in step S2308 and information on the calculation result in step S2309 are written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S2310). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S2311, similarly to step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the number of entering balls of each type during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S2312, the number of balls entered in the first Similarly to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of various types of balls entering the ball in the opening/closing execution mode and in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. Further, in step S2313, various parameters are calculated in the same way as step S1013 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result in step S2314 is written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S2314). In this case, information on the calculation results is written so as not to overwrite information on other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S2315, similarly to step S1015 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the numbers of various entering balls in the high probability mode are calculated, and in step S2316, the number of balls entering the above-mentioned first Similarly to step S1016 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the embodiment, the number of various types of balls entering is calculated in the high probability mode and in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open. Further, in step S2317, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result in step S2317 is written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S2318). In this case, information on the calculation results is written so as not to overwrite information on other calculation results already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds. Thereafter, an infinite loop occurs, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2401: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S2402). In the output processing, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. In this case, if only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. If various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the multiple calculation triggers are read by the reading device. .

Thereafter, history information output processing is executed (step S2403). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, various kinds of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the historical information in this way, it becomes possible for the operator using the reading device to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clearing processing is executed (step S2404). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. In addition, in the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". This brings the calculation result memory 131 into an initialized state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters on a business day basis.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is to be stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, so that the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This allows the management CPU 112 to calculate various parameters based on instructions from the main CPU 63.

Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written into the calculation result memory 131. This makes it possible to accumulate various parameters in the management IC 66, and when reading various parameters with a reading device, it becomes possible to read out various parameters for a plurality of business days at once.

When various parameters are written into the calculation result memory 131, information that makes it possible to specify when the various parameters were calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while keeping track of when the various parameters were calculated.

Note that when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the calculation trigger are written to the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0". This makes it difficult for new history information to be written into the history memory 117 in a situation where the maximum number of history information that can be stored has already been stored in the history memory 117.

Alternatively, the information to be externally outputted to the reading device may be only information on various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be outputted externally. . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

<Fourth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the third embodiment in the processing configuration of the power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a power outage response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2502). In the various calculation processes, steps S2302 to S2309, steps S2311 to S2313, and steps S2315 to S2317 of the power outage response process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S2502 is within the reference range (step S2503). in particular,
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 '') are set as parameters to be determined whether or not they are within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2503.

Note that the predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. for example,
- Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K2/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be configured as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be within the reference range, for example, when the value of the second parameter is greater than or equal to 0.1 and less than or equal to 0.2. Alternatively, only the predetermined parameters to be determined in step S2503 may be calculated in the various calculation processes in step S2502.

If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S2503: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S2502 are written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S2504). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S2503: YES), the process of step S2504 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters when a predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written into the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the history thereof can be left in the calculation result memory 131, and the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, or if the process in step S2504 is executed, a process to clear the history memory 117 is executed (step S2505). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. After the process in step S2505 is executed, an infinite loop occurs and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether the contents of various calculated parameters are included in the reference range or not, and only the various parameters determined to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. written. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131, and it becomes possible to suppress the required storage capacity in the calculation result memory 131.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the third embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the third embodiment described above will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the third embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 56(a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

It is determined whether a game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2601). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, an increment process is performed for a ball entry counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S2602). In this addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated in this processing round. The identification is made based on the number of times step S705 is executed in the management output process (FIG. 24). Then, the number of the identified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2603). If it is "500" or more (step S2603: YES), subtraction processing of the ball entry counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2604). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter. Thereafter, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S2605). In this output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

FIG. 56(b) is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is a process that is executed instead of the power outage response process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 22), and in the management processing, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607 is executed. The history setting process, the external output process of step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2701: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S2702). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power outage response process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage aspects in detail.

In addition, since the configuration is such that various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters can be calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fifth embodiment described above will be explained. Note that the description of the same configuration as in the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 24).

It is determined whether a game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S2801). When a negative determination is made in step S2801, the value of the continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2802). The continuation counter is a period during which a game ball does not enter any of the out opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. This is a counter for specifying.

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S2803: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). If the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S2803. The stopping reference value is set so that Further, the time measurement flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify whether or not to measure time to specify the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of the time measurement flag is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S2805).

If a negative determination is made in step S2803, if the process of step S2804 is executed, or if the process of step S2805 is executed, the condition is that the time measurement flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Step S2806: YES), the value of the measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2807). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time to specify the timing to switch the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

It is determined whether the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the instruction reference value (step S2808). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S2808 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2808, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S2809), and a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S2810). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the 15th buffer 122o at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, so it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped in a situation where no game is being played, and when the game round is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation targets of various parameters, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive various parameters in a situation where a game is being played.

Note that instead of the configuration in which whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed is measured using a measurement counter, a configuration may be adopted in which it is measured using the RTC 115.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management CPU 112 to execute calculations of various parameters is different from the first embodiment, and the main CPU 63 specifies whether or not the calculation trigger has occurred. This is performed independently by the management CPU 112 instead of by the CPU 112 on the management side. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 25).

Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether the history information to be updated has been stored in the history memory 117 (step S2901). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, an increment process is performed for the ball entry counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S2902). In this addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated in this processing round. This is determined based on the number of times that history information corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball being entered is stored in the history setting process. Then, the number of the specified game balls is added to the ball entry counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the ball entry counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2903). If it is "500" or more (step S2903: YES), subtraction processing of the ball entry counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2904). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the ball entry counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2905). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S2302 to S2318 of the power outage response process (FIG. 53) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage aspects in detail.

In addition, since the configuration is such that various parameters are calculated based on whether the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA exceeds the trigger reference number, various parameters can be calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameter calculations from being performed meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not being played continuously.

In addition, the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the timing for calculating various parameters is independently determined by the management CPU 112. Thereby, there is no need for the main CPU 63 to execute processing for determining the triggers for calculating various parameters, so that the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In this embodiment, a calculation result memory 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 50). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117, and writes the various parameters resulting from the calculation into the calculation result memory 131. In addition, in this embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high probability mode has started, and a signal indicating that the high probability mode has ended. A signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. be done.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3001). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that they correspond to any of the ball entry sections, and the eighth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode starts. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high probability mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high probability mode, the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the start of opening the front door frame 14, and the first correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high probability mode. Information corresponding to the completion of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13 correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S3001, the check target counter is set to "13".

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3002). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "10", the 10th buffer 122j is to be checked for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be checked for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S3003). Then, writing processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S3004). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is currently the writing target is identified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S3003 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Further, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter value, and written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o is the target for reading the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the 10th correspondence area 123j is the correspondence relation information read target, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence relation. The information is to be read.

Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S3005). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read out, and 1 is added to the numerical information. Then, it is determined whether the pointer information after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the history area 124 (step S3006).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S3006: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S3007). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters and total time information of the calculation results are written into the calculation result memory 131 (step S3008). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, write the calculation result information so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. conduct. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, status information inheritance processing is executed (step S3009). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is in the opening/closing execution mode, whether the high probability mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. Determine whether it exists or not. Then, the status information is written to the management side RAM 114.

After that, clearing processing of the history memory 117 is executed (step S3010). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0", and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". This brings the history area 124 into an initialized state. Furthermore, after executing the clearing process, the state information written to the management side RAM 114 in step S3009 is read. If state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is stored, history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. At the same time as writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. Additionally, if state information indicating that the high probability mode is in effect is stored, history information indicating that the high probability mode is in effect is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the target pointer information. At the same time as writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. In addition, if status information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is written corresponding to the pointer information targeted for writing. It is written into the history information storage area 125, and the pointer information to be written is incremented by 1.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, if a negative determination is made in step S3006, or if the process in step S3010 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3011). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3012). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3012: NO), the processes from step S3002 onwards are executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the number of history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which history information exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117 and becomes a storage target, making it impossible to accurately calculate various parameters.

Furthermore, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been subjected to calculations of various parameters from becoming a calculation target of various parameters again.

Furthermore, even if the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information inheritance process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage state information.

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. First to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are provided in each of these areas 141 to 144, respectively. The first counters 141a to 144a of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 141b to 144b of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of each of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of each area 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the output opening 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g into which signals corresponding to the result of the ball entering either the opening 33 or the second operating opening 34 are input. Therefore, signals corresponding to status information such as whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, whether the high probability mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open or not are input to the eighth to tenth channels. The buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the above measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not it is a measurement target is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the history setting process in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112.

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. As already explained in this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, "10" is set in the check target counter in step S3101. do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current counters to be checked are buffers to which the status information signal is input (step S3102). Specifically, in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked, information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in effect, information indicating that the high probability mode is in effect, and the front door are stored as correspondence information. It is determined whether any of the information indicating that the frame is frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, a state information setting process is executed (step S3103). In this setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. The information on the first state is stored in the RAM 114, and when the output state of the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high probability mode is in effect switches from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high probability mode is in the high probability mode is stored in the management side RAM 114. However, when the output state of the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the 10th signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. is stored in the management side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is erased from the management side RAM 114.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the buffer is stored in one of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o that corresponds to the value of the current check target counter and into which a signal of information different from the status information is input. By checking whether the numerical information displayed has been changed from "0" to "1", it can be determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S3104). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S3105). In the addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth total counters 141a to 141o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 141e for totaling will be the target of addition, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 141a for totaling will be the target of addition. .

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S3106). If the state is the first state (step S3106: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding first state is executed (step S3107). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 142a for the first state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether it is in the high probability mode (step S3108). In the case of the second state (step S3108: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding second state is executed (step S3109). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state becomes the addition target, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state becomes the addition target. It is subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether the third state is present, that is, whether the front door frame 14 is open (step S3110). In the case of the third state (step S3110: YES), addition processing of the counter for the corresponding third state is executed (step S3111). In this addition process, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is to be added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is to be added. It is subject to addition.

If the process of step S3103 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S3104, if a negative determination is made in step S3110, or if the process of step S3111 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S3112). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3113). If the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S3113: NO), the process from step S3102 onwards is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is set as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

Since the information is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a, in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment, the output port 24a such as step S1002 is stored. A process of calculating the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 such as step S1005. The process of calculating and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34, such as step S1006, become unnecessary. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In addition, in the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c are all in the general winning hole. 31, it is necessary to perform a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Furthermore, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls that enter the ball in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open during the opening/closing execution mode from the number of balls that enter the ball in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment, the process of step S1012 is not executed. Similarly, it is not possible to distinguish the number of balls that enter the ball that occurs in the high probability mode and the front door frame 14 is open from the number of balls that enter the ball that occurs in other situations. Therefore, in the external output process (FIG. 28) in this embodiment, the process of step S1016 is not executed.

<Tenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the storage means in which history information is stored. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102 as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the entry history of balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. In other words, the main RAM 65, in which information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63 is temporarily stored, is also used as a memory for storing ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I/F 111, and when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, it accesses the main side RAM 65 and reads out the ball entry history. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, but the ball entry history stored in the main side RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing ball entry detection processing in this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When it is confirmed that the situation has changed from the situation where the information of “0” is stored to the situation where the information of “1” is stored for the 0th bit D0, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3201: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3202). The general prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning hole 31 as a ball entering history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter will not change even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Memory is retained. Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3203).

When it is confirmed that the first bit D1 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3204: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3205). Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3206).

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the situation where the information of "0" is stored to the situation where the information of "1" is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a detects the state of "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3207: YES). In this case, the value of the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3208). Thereafter, the value of the 10 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3209).

When it is confirmed that the third bit D3 has changed from the situation where information of "0" is stored to the situation where information of "1" is stored, one game is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3211). Further, the value of the special electric winning prize counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3212). The special electric winning prize counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 as a ball entering history. The value of the special electric prize winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. By the way, backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, so even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the special electric winning counter will not change. Memory is retained. Thereafter, the value of the 15 award balls counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3213).

When it is confirmed that the fourth bit D4 has changed from the state where the information of "0" is stored to the state where the information of "1" is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects the state of "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3214: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag in the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3215). Further, the value of the first operation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3216). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the first operation port 33 as a ball entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter will not change even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. is stored in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3217).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a detects "1". It is determined that three game balls have been detected (step S3218: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3219). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3220). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. . By the way, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the second operation counter will not change even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. is retained in memory. Thereafter, the value of the one prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3221).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the output detection sensor 48a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S3222: YES). In this case, the value of the out counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3223). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the out port 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 with the reading device. By the way, backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, so even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the out counter will not be memorized. Retained.

When it is confirmed that the seventh bit D7 has changed from the state in which "0" information is stored to the state in which "1" information is stored, the gate detection sensor 49a detects one game It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3224: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3225).

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the entry history of balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined by each ball entering section. The number of balls entered is stored in the main side RAM 65. As a result, every time a ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No need to output. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting signals from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112.

In this embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads the number of balls that entered the general winning hole 31 from the general winning counter in the main side RAM 65, and reads the number of balls that entered the general winning hole 31 from the special winning prize counter in the main side RAM 65 to the special electric winning prize device 32. Read the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 from the first operating counter of the main side RAM 65, read the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 from the second operating counter of the main side RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter in the main side RAM 65. Then, the first to eighth parameters described in the first embodiment are calculated using each of the read numbers of entering balls. However, the number of each entering ball is not measured while distinguishing between the number of entering balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of entering balls when the front door frame 14 is closed. Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated including the number of balls that enter the ball when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, each number of balls entering during the opening/closing execution mode and each number of balls entering during the high probability mode are not measured individually, so the first parameter to the 18th parameter and the 21st parameter to The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written into the calculation result memory 131. Then, when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters currently written in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

Note that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but the information on the number of balls entered, which is stored as the entry history in the main RAM 65, is transmitted to the management IC 66 under transfer control by the main CPU 63. A configuration may also be used. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 from accessing the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Eleventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the type of signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the way the ball entry history is stored in each ball entry section. ing. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101, and a reading terminal 102 as in the first embodiment. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management I/F 111, a management CPU 112, a management ROM 113, a management RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, unlike the first embodiment. Also. The main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 151 in addition to the MPU 62 . The notification light emitting section 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using information about the history of ball entry into each ball entry section read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting section 151 is controlled according to the contents of the various calculated parameters. The notification light emitting unit 151 is housed in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main controller 60, but the board box 60a is formed transparent and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is not visible outside the board box 60a. A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that visual confirmation can be made from the outside. As a result, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and making it possible to visually check the main control device 60, the notification light emitting section 151 can be opened without the need for opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emitting state of the light.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, and the signal corresponding to the high probability mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. Although the configuration is such that the signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in this embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high probability mode, and the signal corresponding to the front door frame The signal corresponding to 14 is not input to input port 121. In other words, signals related to ball entry history are not input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are determined by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management CPU 112. Similar to the first embodiment, the process for identifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started. On the other hand, it is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 outputs the output to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from a LOW level to a HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 15th buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. These are the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g into which signals corresponding to the result of the ball entering the corner are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not it is a measurement target is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 22).

First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S3301). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to seventh reception-related areas 123a to 123j, so in step S3301, "7" is set in the check target counter. do.

Thereafter, it is checked whether the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S3302). Note that when the value of the counter to be checked is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer 122e will be the target of numerical information verification, and if the value of the counter to be verified is "1", the first buffer 122a will be the target of numerical information verification. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, addition processing for the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S3303). In this addition process, the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the counter to be checked is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is to be added, and if the value of the counter to be checked is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is to be added.

If a negative determination is made in step S3302, or if the process in step S3303 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3304). Then, it is determined whether the value of the check target counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S3305). If the value of the check target counter is 1 or more (step S3305: NO), the process from step S3302 onwards is executed for the check target corresponding to the new check target counter value.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is set as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management CPU 112. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 22).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S3401: YES), the output target counters provided in the management RAM 114 include the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152a. 152o, the number of counters to which count information is output is set in the management CPU 112 (step S3402). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blankness is stored is identified, and the number of correspondence areas is identified. Set the information of the number in the confirmation target counter. In this embodiment, as already explained, since information other than information indicating blankness is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, "7" is set in the output target counter in step S3402. .

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read out (step S3403), and the history The number information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117 is read out (step S3404). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the target of reading the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counter 152a to 152o reads the number of times information. Targeted. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the target for reading the number information, and the value of the output target counter becomes the target for reading the correspondence information. If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the object of reading the correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a becomes the object of reading the number information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S3405). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read in step S3403 and the number of times information read in step S3404 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number of times information regarding the correspondence information that is currently being output.

Thereafter, the value of the output target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S3406). Then, it is determined whether the value of the output target counter after being subtracted by 1 is "0" (step S3407). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S3407: NO), the process from step S3403 onward is executed for the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the parameter management process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

First, it is determined whether an opportunity to calculate various parameters has occurred (step S3501). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and similarly to the fifth embodiment, the output opening 24a, the general prize opening 31, and the special prize winning This occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 exceeds 500, which is the trigger reference number. Since the first time the parameter management process is executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as the calculation trigger, various parameters can be calculated by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 and then turning it on again. It becomes possible to easily generate an opportunity. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, notifications corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are executed as described later. It becomes possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball enters the ball. In addition, by configuring a configuration in which a calculation trigger occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the game reaches the trigger standard number of 500 or more, it is possible to finely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA. becomes.

When a calculation trigger occurs (step S3501: YES), the ball entry history is read out from the counter that stores the ball entry history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 (step S3501: YES). S3502). Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 is able to recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the ball entry history is read based on the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S3503). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read out in step S3502 and information on the number of prize balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main side CPU 63 uses the program and data stored in the main side ROM 64 to determine whether each ball entry history read out in step S3502 is set to the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the first operating hole 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two operating ports 34 corresponds to, and it is also possible to specify information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S3502. .

Specifically regarding the various parameters calculated in step S3503,
- Seventh parameter: (K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K5 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K5 x "Second operating port 34 8th parameter: K3 × "Number of prize balls received in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K2 × "Number of prize balls received in the general winning slot 31") Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the first actuation port 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the second actuation port 34 ”) is calculated.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the first range (step S3504). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are determined to be within the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3504. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, a first notification state setting process is executed (step S3505). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined whether the various calculated parameters are within the second range (step S3506). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters 2 range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3506. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3506, a second notification state setting process is executed (step S3507). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 emits yellow light.

If a negative determination is made in step S3506, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, a third notification state setting process is executed (step S3508). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 emits red light.

The light emitting state set in step S3505, step S3507, or step S3508 is set until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Continue until. Furthermore, since the notification state of the notification light emitting section 151 is stored and held in the main side RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is stopped and the notification state of the notification light emitting section is 151 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, the light emitting state corresponds to the type of notification state information stored in the main RAM 65. Light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided to notify contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112. As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so the game hall manager etc. does not have to read out the information stored in the history memory 117 to check the game balls in the game area PA. It becomes possible to grasp the manner in which the ball enters the ball.

A main control board 61 housed in the board box 60a is provided with a notification light emitting section 151 together with the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting section 151.

Calculations of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. This makes it possible to increase the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting section 151.

When the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is entered, and when the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is entered, and the calculation results of various parameters correspond to the second range. A third notification state is entered when the device does not correspond to either the first range or the second range. That is, the various parameters are not reported as they are, but the content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is reported. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting section 151 from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting section 151.

Note that even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151 is continued, so that immediately before the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emitting state in is maintained. In this case, even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151, it is possible to understand the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA. .

In addition, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting section 151 is turned off, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, Alternatively, the notification light emitting section 151 may be controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 in the gaming hall before the start of business, it is possible to grasp the state of ball entry on the immediately preceding business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the notification light emitting section 151, but may be a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41, and the speaker section 54. It may be. Further, a configuration may also be adopted in which signals corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are externally outputted to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

The special figure display section 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the ordinary figure display section 38a of the ordinary figure unit 38 may also have a function as the notification light emitting section 151. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, second range, or other range as in the above embodiment, A configuration may also be adopted in which notification corresponding to the calculation result is executed on the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a immediately after the start of supply of operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when a condition for starting the variable display of the symbol in the special symbol display section 37a or a condition for starting a variable display of the symbol in the regular symbol display section 38a is satisfied. It may be configured such that the process is temporarily interrupted when the start condition for the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to use the special figure display section 37a or the regular figure display section 38a as a notification means for notifying the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA.

The notification light emitting part 151 may be provided at a position where it can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting part 151 may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 from the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. In this case, it becomes possible to check the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring an opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for providing information on each ball entry result to the management IC 66. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for inputting the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

The detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Further, the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch route SL21 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the first signal route SL11, and the first branch route SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch route SL22 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the second signal route SL12, and the second branch route SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch route SL23 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the third signal route SL13, and the third branch route SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch route SL24 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fourth signal route SL14, and the fourth branch route SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch route SL25 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the fifth signal route SL15, and the fifth branch route SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch route SL26 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the sixth signal route SL16, and the sixth branch route SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch route SL27 is formed so as to branch from a midway position of the seventh signal route SL17, and the seventh branch route SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main side CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. Since there is no need to do this, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

Further, the branch points of each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from each of the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist within the MPU 62. This makes it difficult to access the branch point and each branch route SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and prevents fraudulent activity in which an abnormal ball entry result is input only to the management IC 66. .

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode is different depending on whether the result is a jackpot with a low probability or the jackpot with a high probability. Hereinafter, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is a time chart for explaining the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment. 71(a1) and FIG. 71(a2) show the execution period of the open/close execution mode, FIG. 71(b1) and FIG. 71(b2) show the execution period of the round game, and FIG. 71(c1) and FIG. 71( c2) indicates a period during which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state. In addition, Fig. 71 (a1), Fig. 71 (b1), and Fig. 71 (c1) show opening/closing execution in the case of 2R low probability result, 4R low probability result, 6R low probability result, 10R low probability result, and 16R low probability result. The modes of execution are shown in Figure 71 (a2), Figure 71 (b2), and Figure 71 (c2) for 2R high accuracy results, 4R high accuracy results, 6R high accuracy results, 10R high accuracy results, and 16R high accuracy results. The execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode in a certain case is shown.

Regardless of the opening/closing execution mode when the result is low or the opening/closing execution mode when the result is high, opening/closing is executed at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 71(a1) and FIG. 71(a2). The mode is started, and the first round game is executed from timing t2 to timing t3 as shown in FIGS. 71(b1) and 71(b2). Regardless of whether the opening/closing execution mode is a low-probability result or the opening/closing execution mode is a high-probability result, the execution mode of each round game is the same except for the last round game. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 71(c1) and 71(c2), the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the opening duration of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is the same as the game. The period is set to 29 seconds, which is longer than the product of the ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winnings in the round game (10 pieces).

Thereafter, in the opening/closing execution mode when the result is low, the final round game is executed from timing t4 to timing t5 as shown in FIG. 71(b1). The mode of execution of this round game is the same as the mode of execution of the previous round games. In other words, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in each round game, and the duration of opening of the special electric winning device 32 in each round game is the firing period of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of winnings in the round game ( 10), which is longer than the product of 29 seconds. Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

In the opening/closing execution mode when the result is highly certain, the final round game is executed from timing t4 to timing t5 as shown in FIG. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed multiple times with interval periods in between. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71(c2), the timing of t4 to timing of t11, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t16 to the timing of t17, and the timing of t18. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened from the timing of t19 to the timing of t20 to the timing of t5. Then, an ending period occurs from timing t5 to timing t6, and the current opening/closing execution mode ends.

In this case, from the timing t4 to the timing t11, from the timing t12 to the timing t13, from the timing t14 to the timing t15, from the timing t16 to the timing t17, and from the timing t18 to the timing t19, the special electric prize winning device 32 The opening duration period is set to be longer than the firing cycle of game balls (0.6 seconds) and shorter than the product of the firing cycle of game balls (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of prizes for round games (10 pieces). Specifically, it is set to 1 second. During this relatively short opening duration period, the number of winnings to the special electric winning device 32 is about one, and it may happen that no winning to the special electric winning device 32 occurs. In addition, the number of openings of the special electric winning device 32 due to this relatively short opening duration is 5 times, which is less than the upper limit number of winnings, so this is the timing when the last opening due to the relatively short opening duration ends. At the timing of t19, it is unlikely that the special electric winning device 32 has won the winnings of the game balls equal to the upper limit number of winnings in the last round game. Therefore, opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 after the timing t20 occurs with a high probability.

In addition, the relatively short opening duration period means that when the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is placed in the open position, the supply from the receiving part 231 of the guide member 203 to the right end of the guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is short. The period is set during which the game ball can reach a predetermined range X of the guide plate section 214. Then, the game ball that has reached this predetermined range X can fall below the opening/closing member 202 and enter the through gate 35 by moving the opening/closing member 202 from the open position to the closed position in that situation. As a result, each time the opening of the special electric winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration period ends, a chance of winning a game ball to the through gate 35 occurs.

The opening duration period of the special electric prize winning device 32 from the timing t20 to the timing t5 is set to a longer period than the relatively short opening duration period. This relatively long open duration period is set to a period longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of prizes for round games (10 pieces), and specifically, 6 seconds. is set to . During this relatively long opening duration period, it can be expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the upper limit number of game balls. In addition, if a game ball is won to the special electric winning device 32 during the opening times of the special electric winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration, the special electric winning device 32 is won due to the relatively long opening duration. In the middle of the opening of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of prizes won in the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution time will reach the upper limit number of prizes won.

In the last round game of the opening/closing execution mode when the result is high, the special electric winning device 32 is opened five times with a relatively short opening duration as described above, and then the opening continues for a relatively long time. The special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once according to the period, but between each of these opening times there is an interval period in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is in a closed state. In other words, as shown in FIG. 71(c2), the timing from t11 to t12, the timing from t13 to t14, the timing from t15 to t16, the timing from t17 to t18, and the timing from t19 to t20. The special electric prize winning device 32 is maintained in the closed state over the timing of . These interval periods are all the same, and specifically set to 1 second.

As mentioned above, in the round game of the last execution, the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 occurs multiple times, so that when the game ball is placed on the guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32, the relevant There will be many opportunities for the opening/closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position. As a result, it is possible to provide many opportunities for winning the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode when the result is highly accurate. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the advantage of a highly accurate result compared to a low accurate result.

In addition, since the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game of the last run is performed with a relatively short opening duration, the duration of the round game of the last run becomes extremely long. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. In addition, the number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper limit number of winnings before all the opening times of the special electric winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration period are completed. It becomes possible to

Next, the processing configuration of the main CPU 63 that enables the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode as described above will be explained. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing special call start processing in this embodiment. The special train start process is executed in step S1209 of the special train special train control process (FIG. 38). Steps S3601 to S3603 are the same as steps S1601 to S1603 of the special train start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment. Execute the same process. If the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3604: YES), a round number setting process is executed (step S3605). In the round number setting process, the round number of the current opening/closing execution mode is set in a round counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The round counter is a counter used by the main CPU 63 to specify the remaining number of round games in the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if it is a 2R low probability result or a 2R high probability result, the round counter is set to "2", if it is a 4R low probability result or a 4R high probability result, the round counter is set to "4", and the 6R result is set to "4". If it is a low probability result or 6R high probability result, set the round counter to "6", if it is a 10R low probability result or 10R high probability result, set the round counter to "10", and if it is a 16R low probability result or 16R high probability result, set the round counter to "6". If the result is certain, "16" is set in the round counter. Further, if the result is any small hit, the value of the round counter is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a process for setting the number of openings and closings is executed (step S3606). In the opening/closing count setting process in the special electric start process, if any jackpot result is obtained, "1" is set in the opening/closing count counter of the main side RAM 65 as the opening/closing count of the special electric winning device 32 in the round game of the first execution. If the current game result is the first small winning result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", and if the current gaming result is the second small winning result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". 5" is set, and if the current game result is the third small winning result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "10". Thereafter, in steps S3607 to S3610, the same processes as steps S1606 to S1609 of the special electric charge start process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating the special electricity release process in this embodiment. Note that the special train opening process is executed in step S1210 of the special figure special train control process (FIG. 38).

If a winning has occurred in the special electric winning device 32 (step S3701: YES), the value of the winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3702). If the value of the winning counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3703: YES), if it is a jackpot result, it is necessary to end the current round game, and if it is a small win result, it is necessary to end the current round game. Need to exit run mode. Therefore, the value of the opening/closing frequency counter of the main side RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3704).

Thereafter, on the condition that the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S3705: YES), the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3706). Then, a process for setting the number of openings and closings is executed (step S3707). In this setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", no value is set to the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65. In addition, in this setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "1", the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a low probability result. On the other hand, if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a highly accurate result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "6". In addition, in the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Further, a setting process for the upper limit number of prizes to be won is executed (step S3708). In this setting process, if the current round counter value is "0", no value is set to the winning counter in the main RAM 65, and if the current round counter value is 1 or more, the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is not set. ``10'' is set on the counter as the upper limit number of prizes for a new round game. Thereafter, in steps S3709 to S3711, the processes of steps S1703 to S1705 of the special electric power release process (FIG. 43) in the first embodiment are executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3701 or step S3703, by determining whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", the opening duration of the current opening of the special electric prize winning device 32 is determined. It is determined whether the time has elapsed (step S3712). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the value of the opening/closing frequency counter of the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3713). Then, if the value of the opening/closing number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3714: YES) and the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode this time is any jackpot result (step S3715: YES), The value of the round counter in the main side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3716). Further, a process for setting the number of times of opening and closing is executed (step S3717). In this setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "0", no value is set to the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65. In addition, in this setting process, if the current value of the round counter is "1", the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a low probability result. On the other hand, if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a highly accurate result, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "6". In addition, in the setting process, if the current value of the round counter is 2 or more, the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Further, a setting process for the upper limit number of prizes to be won is executed (step S3718). In this setting process, if the current round counter value is "0", no value is set to the winning counter in the main RAM 65, and if the current round counter value is 1 or more, the winning counter in the main RAM 65 is not set. ``10'' is set on the counter as the upper limit number of prizes for a new round game. Thereafter, the processes of steps S3709 to S3711 are executed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the special electric train closing process in this embodiment. The special train closed process is executed in step S1211 of the special train special train control process (FIG. 38).

In steps S3801 to S3804, the same processes as steps S1801 to S1804 of the special electric train closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3801, or if the process in step S3804 is executed, it is determined whether both the round counter of the main side RAM 65 and the opening/closing counter of the main side RAM 65 are "0" ( Step S3805). If a negative determination is made in step S3805, it is determined whether the interval period has elapsed by determining whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (step S3806). If the interval period has elapsed (step S3806: YES), an open continuation period setting process is executed (step S3807). In this setting process, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the second small hit result, information on the opening duration period for the second small win result (specifically, 2 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. If the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the third small winning result, information on the opening duration period (specifically, 1 second) for the third small winning result is set in the special figure special electric timer counter. In addition, in this setting process, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by any of the low probability results, information on the longest opening duration (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special map special electric timer counter. . In addition, in this setting process, if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the high probability results and the value of the round counter is 2 or more, information on the longest opening duration (specifically, 29 seconds) is provided. Set it on the special figure special electric timer counter. In addition, in this setting process, if the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the high certainty results and the value of the round counter is "1", the value of the opening/closing number counter of the main side RAM 65 is "6" to In the case of "2", information on a relatively short opening duration (specifically, 1 second) is set in the special map special electric timer counter, and when the value of the opening/closing number counter in the main side RAM 65 is "1", sets information on a relatively long open duration (specifically, 6 seconds) in the special map special electric timer counter.

Thereafter, in steps S3808 and S3809, the same processes as steps S1810 and S1811 of the special electric train closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, the same processes as steps S1812 to S1814 of the special electric train closing process (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment are executed in steps S3810 to S3812.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 occurs multiple times in the round game of the last execution time, so that the game ball appears on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32. There are many situations in which the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the opening/closing member 202 is placed on the vehicle. As a result, it is possible to provide many opportunities for winning the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode when the result is highly accurate. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the advantage of a highly accurate result compared to a low accurate result.

In addition, since the opening round on the first half side of the round game of the last round is played using a relatively short opening duration, the duration of the round game of the last running round does not become extremely long. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, the number of winning game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the last round game does not reach the upper limit number of winnings before all the opening times of the special electric winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration are completed. It becomes possible to

In the round game of the last execution in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a high probability result, the opening duration of the last opening of the special electric winning device 32 is longer than the above-mentioned relatively short opening duration. is set to . This relatively long open duration period is set to a period longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle (0.6 seconds) and the upper limit number of prizes for round games (10 pieces), and specifically, 6 seconds. is set to . During this relatively long opening duration period, it can be expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the upper limit number of game balls. In addition, if a game ball is won to the special electric winning device 32 during the opening times of the special electric winning device 32 due to the relatively short opening duration, the special electric winning device 32 is won due to the relatively long opening duration. In the middle of the opening of the device 32, there is a high possibility that the number of prizes won in the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game of the final execution time will reach the upper limit number of prizes won.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
- A round game in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened multiple times is not limited to the last round game, and may be the first round game or an intermediate round game. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times in a plurality of round games.

・It is not limited to the configuration in which an open cycle with a relatively short open duration period occurs and then an open cycle with a relatively long open duration period occurs in one round game; The opening times may only occur a plurality of times.

・The relatively short opening duration allows the game ball to reach a position on the guide plate section 214 where it can enter the through gate 35, but the ball does not enter the entrance section 45b of the special electric winning device 32. It is also possible to configure a period in which it is impossible or difficult to do so. In this case, it is possible to create a situation where it is possible to enter the through gate 35 in a situation where it is difficult to enter the ball into the entrance portion 45b of the special electric winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied to a configuration in which only one opening occurs in one round game, instead of a configuration in which multiple openings occur in one round game.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed on the guide plate part 214. Although the configuration is such that the game ball can enter the through gate 35, in this embodiment, the target where the game ball can win is a ball entry section other than the through gate 35. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 75 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a passage forming body 201, an opening/closing member 202, and a guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the fourth discharge passage 45 and cannot pass through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202. The game balls will flow down below the special electric winning device 32. When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, a game ball can be placed on the guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 is placed in the fourth discharge passage. He will be able to join Team 45. Further, in the right area PA3, a guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32, as in the first embodiment. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is guided to the receiving part 231 of the guide member 203 by the guide nail group 241. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening/closing member 202.

A through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric winning device 32 in the right area PA3. In this embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left side area PA2 of the game area PA, and when comparing the same firing operation in which the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the through gate 35 is The frequency of game balls entering the game is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operating port 34 is provided. Therefore, when a game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side area PA2, it becomes possible to enter the through gate 35, and further, the second operating port 34 is opened as a result of the winning into the through gate 35. When the state is reached, it becomes possible to win a prize through the second operating port 34.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as support modes for controlling the state of the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency that the general electric accessory 34a is not in the open state or the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state is relatively low, and in the high-frequency support mode, the frequency that the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after opening/closing execution mode becomes low-frequency support mode, and if the result is high, the support mode after opening/closing execution mode becomes high-frequency support mode. .

A first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252 are provided below the special electric winning device 32 in the right side area PA3. The first special ball entry port 251 and the second special ball entry port 252 are provided with openings opening vertically upward and serving as entry entrances for game balls, and are members that directly open and close these ball entry entrances. is not provided. In addition, the game ball that entered the first special ball entrance 251 is led out to the back side of the game board 24 and is ejected from the gaming area PA, and the game ball that entered the second special ball entrance 252. is led out to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged from the game area PA. Further, the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction such that the first special ball entrance 251 is on the left side and the second special ball entrance 252 is on the right side. .

The first special ball entry port 251 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a for detecting the game ball that has entered the first special ball entry port 251, and the second special ball entry port 252 is provided with a first special detection sensor 251a for detecting the game ball that has entered the first special ball entry port 251. A second special detection sensor 252a is provided for detecting a game ball that has entered the second special ball entrance 252. These first special detection sensor 251a and second special detection sensor 252a are electrically connected to the main CPU 63.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing ball entry detection processing executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the ball entry inspection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When one game ball is detected by the first special detection sensor 251a (step S3901: YES), 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S3902). The 10 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. If the value of the 10 prize balls counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 10 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 award balls counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When one game ball is detected by the second special detection sensor 252a (step S3903: YES), the value of the five prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3904). The 5 prize balls counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that five game balls should be paid out. If the value of the counter for 5 prize balls is 1 or more, the 5 prize balls command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12), and the 5 prize balls are output. When the command is output once, the value of the 5 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 5 prize balls command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 5 game balls are paid out.

Note that in the ball entry detection process, other processes are also executed (step S3905). In other processes, the same processes as steps S301 to S325 of the ball entry detection process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment are executed.

Returning to the explanation of the game board 24 (FIG. 75), the first special ball entrance 251 is arranged downstream of the special electric winning device 32 and closer to the path forming body 201 of the special electric winning device 32. Moreover, a first guiding nail group 253 is provided between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the first special ball entry opening 251 by a plurality of nails 24b. The first guide nail group 253 allows game balls existing on the left side of the first guide nail group 253 to enter the first special ball entrance 251, and The game ball located on the right side is not allowed to enter the first special ball entrance 251. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where a game ball is present on the first range Balls can enter the first special ball entrance 251, and other game balls cannot enter the first special ball entrance 251.

The distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 in the first range X1 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, specifically, twice the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 on the first range X1 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, or may be larger than twice the diameter of the game ball. You can also use it as

The second special ball entry port 252 is located on the downstream side of the special electric prize winning device 32, to the right of the first special ball entry port 251, but spaced apart to the left of the right end of the opening/closing member 202. Further, a second guiding nail group 254 is provided between the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 and the second special ball entry opening 252 by a plurality of nails 24b. The second guide nail group 254 allows game balls existing to the left of the second guide nail group 254 to enter the second special ball entrance 252, and The game balls that are present on the right side are not allowed to enter the second special ball entrance 252. As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball exists on the second range X2 near the center on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the game ball will The ball can enter the second special ball entrance 252, and other game balls cannot enter the second special ball entrance 252. In this case, even if the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where the game ball is present at a position to the right of the second range X2 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202, the game The ball does not enter the second special ball entrance 252. Furthermore, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the game ball passes through the opening 213 of the opening/closing member 202 at a position to the right of the second range X2, so the game ball enters the second special entry position. The ball does not enter the ball mouth 252.

The distance dimension along the guide plate part 214 in the second range X2 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and specifically, it is 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distance dimension along the guide plate portion 214 on the second range X2 may be less than the diameter of the game ball, and may be more than 2.5 times the diameter of the game ball. It may also be a large configuration.

Next, how a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252 in the opening/closing execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 77. FIG. 77(a) shows a period in which the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 is placed in the open position, and FIG. 77(b) shows a game ball in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202. FIG. 77(c) shows the period during which the game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and FIG. The timing at which a game ball enters the ball opening 251 is shown, and FIG. 77(e) shows the timing at which a game ball enters the second special ball entry opening 252.

First, the case where a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 will be described. At timing t1, the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position as shown in FIG. 77(a). After that, as shown in FIG. 77(c) from timing t2 to timing t3, a game ball exists in the second range X2 on the guide plate part 214, and the game ball further flows down on the guide plate part 214. As a result, the game ball exists in the first range X1 on the guide plate portion 214 from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 77(b). Then, at timing t4 when the game ball is present in the first range X1 on the guide plate section 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77(a). As a result, the game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 77(d). Then, when the game balls enter the first special ball entrance 251, the ten game balls are paid out.

Next, a case where a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252 will be explained. At timing t6, the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position as shown in FIG. 77(a). Thereafter, the game ball will exist in the second range X2 on the guide plate section 214 as shown in FIG. 77(c) from timing t7 to timing t8. Then, at timing t8 when the game ball is present in the second range X2 on the guide plate section 214, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position as shown in FIG. 77(a). As a result, the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252 at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 77(e). Then, when the game balls enter the second special ball entrance 252, the five game balls are paid out.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

By shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes possible not only to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32, but also to enter the game ball into the special ball entry openings 251 and 252. Then, the payout of game balls is executed not only when the game balls enter the special electric winning device 32 but also when the game balls enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls paid out in the opening/closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to increase the advantage of the opening/closing execution mode.

The special ball entry ports 251 and 252 are provided at the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32 and at a position where game balls can enter at the timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from one of the open state and the closed state to the other. ing. As a result, game balls that have leaked as targets for entering the special electric winning device 32 enter the special ball entry ports 251, 252, and by entering the game balls into the special ball entry ports 251, 252, the game balls are paid out. It will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of disadvantage regarding the occurrence of game balls that have leaked from the target balls of the special electric winning device 32.

When the opening/closing member 202 of the special electric winning device 32 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other, the game ball that was placed on the guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202 can enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252. becomes. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, the player can check not only whether or not the game ball enters the fourth discharge passage section 45 of the special electric winning device 32, but also whether the game ball is placed on the guide plate section 214. Attention is paid to whether or not the opening/closing member 202 moves from one of the open position and the closed position to the other in the opening/closing execution mode, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

An opportunity for a game ball to enter the special ball entry openings 251, 252 occurs at the timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state but also when it is switched to the closed state.

The guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is formed so that the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 flows down to the left along the guide plate part 214. The special ball entry ports 251 and 252 are opened when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed on a part of the ranges X1 and X2 of the guide plate section 214. It is provided at a position where the game ball can enter the ball by falling downward. In this case, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entrances 251 and 252, it is necessary not only for the game ball to be placed on the guiding plate part 214 in a situation where the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, but also for the game ball to be placed on the guiding plate part 214. It is necessary for the opening/closing member 202 to move from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing when the game balls are present in a part of the ranges X1 and X2. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball placed on the guide plate section 214 and the timing of switching the state of the opening/closing member 202, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode. becomes.

A guide nail group 241 is provided on the upstream side of the special electric winning device 32 to guide the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202. Ranges X1 and X2 that allow game balls to enter the special ball entry ports 251 and 252 in the guide plate portion 214 are set to be biased toward the left end side of the opening/closing member 202. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry ports 251 and 252, the opening/closing member 202 is moved from the open position to the closed position at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down on the guide plate part 214. Need to move. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the guide plate section 214, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, in the special electric winning device 32, the entrance portion 45b of the fourth discharge passage portion 45 is located to the left of the ranges X1 and X2 that allow the game balls to enter the special ball entry ports 251 and 252 in the guide plate portion 214. exists in As a result, game balls that are placed on the guide plate section 214 but do not reach the entrance section 45b enter the special entrance ball openings 251 and 252. Therefore, the player's feeling of disadvantage when the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 does not win in the special electric winning device 32 is reduced, and conversely, the player feels disadvantageous when the game ball placed on the guide board part 214 does not win in the special winning ball openings 251 and 252. It is possible to turn this into a sense of profit.

A first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252 are provided as special ball entrances 251 and 252 that allow ball entry when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. The number of game balls to be put out is different depending on whether the game balls enter the second special ball entrance 252 or the second special ball entrance 252. When the first condition is satisfied in the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball enters the first special entrance ball opening 251, and when the second condition is satisfied in the opening/closing execution mode, the game ball enters the second special entrance opening 252. The ball enters the ball. As a result, the player not only expects the game balls to enter the special ball entry ports 251 and 252 in the opening/closing execution mode, but also expects the game balls to enter the first special ball entry port 251, which is the side where a large number of game balls are paid out. It is expected that the game ball will enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening/closing execution mode.

The first special ball entrance 251 allows the game ball to enter when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed in the first range X1 on the guide plate section 214. located at the location. In addition, the second special ball entrance 252 allows the game ball to enter when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed in the second range X2 on the guide plate section 214. It is located at a location where As a result, not only is it expected that the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position when the game ball is placed in either the first range X1 or the second range X2, but also It is expected that the opening/closing member 202 will move from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is on it, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a configuration where the guide nail group 241 is provided so that game balls flowing into the right side area PA3 are guided to the right end side of the opening/closing member 202, the second range X2 is set at the center side of the opening/closing member 202 in the lateral direction. At the same time, the first range X1 is set at a position offset to the left end side of the opening/closing member 202. Further, on the left side of the opening/closing member 202, there is an entrance portion 45b of the special electric prize winning device 32. As a result, game balls existing on the guide plate portion 214 at a position closer to the entrance portion 45b of the special electric winning device 32 are more likely to enter the first special ball entrance 251 where the number of balls to be paid out is larger. In this case, it becomes possible to make the profit for the player higher in a situation where the sense of disadvantage that the game ball unfortunately did not enter the entrance part 45b of the special electric winning device 32 becomes stronger.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
- A configuration may be adopted in which only one of the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 is provided. In addition, in addition to the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252, a third special ball entrance is provided, which opens and closes when a game ball is placed on the third range of the guide plate section 214. The game ball may enter the third special ball entrance when the member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position.

・Even if a game ball enters either the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252, it is not limited to a configuration in which only the game ball is paid out; for example, the first special ball entrance When a game ball enters the ball opening 251, the first holding information or second holding information that triggers the propriety judgment process is acquired, and when the game ball enters the second special ball opening 252, the first holding information or the second holding information is acquired. A configuration may also be adopted in which the payout of game balls is executed. In this case, different benefits will be given depending on when the game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251 and when the game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252.

Further, for example, when a game ball enters the first special ball entrance 251, one of the first reservation information and the second reservation information is acquired, and the game ball enters the second special entrance 252. In some cases, the other of the first reservation information and the second reservation information may be acquired. As a result, even if the game ball enters either of the special ball entrances 251 and 252, the hold information that triggers the judgment process is acquired, but the type of hold information that is acquired is the first special ball entrance. The case where a game ball enters the opening 251 and the case where a game ball enters the second special ball entrance 252 are different.

Also, for example, even if a game ball enters either the first special ball entrance 251 or the second special ball entrance 252, the reservation information on the general ball side is acquired, but the reservation information on the acquired general ball side is A configuration may be adopted in which the probability that the second actuating port 34 is in the normally open state is different depending on the information.

- The first range X1 is not limited to a configuration that is narrower than the second range X2, and the width of the first range X1 and the width of the second range X2 may be the same or approximately the same, The first range X1 may be wider than the second range X2.

- The game balls entering the special ball entry ports 251, 252 are not limited to the configuration in which they are led out to the back side of the game board 24, and the special ball entry ports 251, 252 are provided in a gate shape. Accordingly, the game balls that have entered the special ball entrances 251 and 252 may continue to flow down the game area PA. This makes it easier for the game ball to reach the lower area PA4.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, instead of the special electric winning device 32, a first special electric winning device 261 and a second special electric winning device 262 are provided. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 78 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In place of the special electric winning device 32, a first special electric winning device 261 and a second special electric winning device 262 are provided in the right side area PA3 of the gaming area PA. These first special line winning device 261 and second special line winning device 262 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction so that the first special line winning device 261 is on the upper side and the second special line winning device 262 is on the lower side. In addition, in the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided as a ball entry part that causes the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to be opened, but in this embodiment, the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is provided with the through gate 35 A first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as ball entry portions that trigger the opening of the object 34a. The first through gate 263 is provided to the left of the first special electric winning device 261, and the second through gate 264 is provided to the left of the second special electric winning device 262.

The configuration of the first special electric prize winning device 261 and the configuration of the first through gate 263 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b). 79(a) and 79(b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA in FIG. 78.

A first big prize opening 265 is formed in the game board 24 so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the first big prize opening 265 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3, but to the right of the first through gate 263. A first special electric prize winning device 261 is provided so as to prevent or allow a game ball to enter the first big winning hole 265. The first special winning prize device 261 includes a first guide plate 271 provided below the first big prize opening 265 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The first guide plate 271 is provided so as to be movable in the front and rear directions by being driven by a drive means (not shown), and is set at a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. , and a guiding position, which is a position where the pachinko machine 10 is slid forward from the blocking position and where the amount of protrusion of the game board 24 from the board surface to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

In the game board 24, a first ball receiving part 272 is provided above the right end of the first guide plate 271, and further above the first special electric winning device 261 in the right area PA3, there is a ball receiving part 272 located above the right side end of the first guide plate 271. A first guiding nail group 267 is provided for guiding all the game balls that have flowed into the area PA3 to the first ball receiving portion 272 (see FIG. 78). The first guide nail group 267 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. All the game balls flowing into the right side area PA3 are guided to the first ball receiving part 272 by the first guide nail group 267. The distance between the front end of the first ball receiving portion 272 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 is sloped downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game balls that have reached the upper surface of the first ball receiving portion 272 will flow down toward the front side of the Pachinko machine 10 due to their own weight.

When the first guide plate 271 is placed in the blocking position, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. It also has large dimensions. In this blocking position, the front end of the first guide plate 271 is located on the rear side of the Pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the first ball receiving part 272. Therefore, a game ball that reaches the upper surface of the first ball receiving part 272 when the first guide plate 271 is placed at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the first ball receiving part 272 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the first ball receiving part 272. In addition, the game ball guided by the first guide nail group 267 bounces on the first ball receiving part 272, so that the first guide plate 271, which is disposed at the blocking position, is on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24. It is also assumed that it will rest on the upper surface of the area that protrudes from the surface. On the other hand, the upper surface of the area of the first guide plate 271 disposed at the blocking position that protrudes toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 is sloped downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if a game ball lands on the upper surface of the first guide plate 271 located at the blocking position, the game ball does not enter the first grand prize opening 265 or the first through gate 263 and is placed on the first guide plate 271. It will fall below the first guide plate 271 from between the front end of the guide plate 271 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the first guide plate 271 is placed in the blocking position, the occurrence of a winning in the first big winning opening 265 is prevented, and the occurrence of a winning in the first through gate 263 is prevented. be done.

When the first guide plate 271 is placed at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the distance between the front end of the first guide plate 271 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. The dimensions are also small. In this guiding position, the front end of the first guiding plate 271 is located closer to the front of the Pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the first ball receiving part 272. Therefore, a game ball that reaches the upper surface of the first ball receiving part 272 when the first guide plate 271 is placed at the guide position protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24 on the first guide plate 271. It will be placed on top of the area where it is located.

On the upper surface of the protruding area 273 that protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24 when the first guiding plate 271 is placed at the guiding position, there is a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface. 274 is formed. With the boundary part 274 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding area 273 is connected to a first guiding area 275 existing in front of the first ball receiving part 272 and a first big winning area to the left of the first guiding area 275. It is divided into a second guide area 276 that continues to the mouth 265 and a third guide area 277 that is to the left of the first guide area 275 and in front of the second guide area 276 and continues to the first through gate 263. There is. The upper surface of the first guiding region 275 slopes downward toward the left. Further, the left end of the first guide region 275 is in contact with both the right end of the second guide region 276 and the right end of the third guide region 277. Thereby, the game ball guided from the first ball receiving part 272 to the first guiding area 275 flows down to the second guiding area 276 or the third guiding area 277 by its own weight. In this case, the range where the left end of the first guide area 275 is in contact with the right end of the second guide area 276 is wider than the range where the left end of the first guide area 275 is in contact with the right end of the third guide area 277. Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guide area 275 flows into the second guide area 276 more easily than the third guide area 277. However, the game balls guided by the first guide area 275 flow into the third guide area 277 at a predetermined frequency (specifically, one out of four balls).

The second guiding area 276 has an upper surface inclined downwardly toward the rear left so as to guide the game balls placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 276 to the first big prize opening 265. As a result, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 276 are likely to enter the first big prize opening 265. The game ball that entered the first big winning hole 265 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first big winning hole 265. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the first big winning opening 265 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, in a round game in which the first big prize opening 265 is to be opened or in an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result, it is specified that one game ball has entered the first big prize opening 265. If so, the value of the winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is decremented by 1. When the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", it is determined that a prize corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes has been won as in the first embodiment, and the opening/closing execution mode is activated based on the round game or small winning result. Terminate it.

The third guide area 277 slopes downward toward the left. Here, when the first guide plate 271 is arranged at the guide position, the first guide plate 271 exists from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the first through gate 263 in the lateral position. I will do it. Furthermore, as already explained, the distance between the front end of the first guiding plate 271 placed at the guiding position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding area 277 moves to the second guiding area 276 for some reason on the way, it will flow down toward the first through gate 263 due to its own weight, and will flow down to the first through gate 263. You will win a prize. The game ball that has entered the first through gate 263 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the first through gate 263. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not there is a prize in the first through gate 263 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. Then, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first through gate 263, on the condition that the holding information on the general ball side of the upper limit number is not stored in the general ball holding area 65c, the general ball Numerical information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the common figure holding area 65c as the pending information on the common figure side.

With the above configuration, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a round game in which the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target or a small winning result in which the first special electric prize winning device 261 is the control target, the first guide plate 271 is When placed at the guiding position, the game ball flowing into the right side area PA3 is guided to either the first big prize opening 265 or the first through gate 263, and the game ball enters the first big prize opening 265 or the first through gate 263. You are guaranteed to win one of them. When a prize is won in the first big prize opening 265, the remaining number of winning maximum number of balls is subtracted by 1 as in the first embodiment, and a specific number of 15 game balls are paid out. Ru. When a prize is won in the first through gate 263, an opportunity to acquire reservation information on the common map side occurs. As a result, when the first special electric winning device 261 becomes the control target, the player can be aware of both that a winning will occur in the first big winning opening 265 and that a winning will occur in the first through gate 263. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the configuration of the second special electric prize winning device 262 and the configuration of the second through gate 264 will be explained with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 78.

A second grand prize opening 266 is formed in the game board 24 so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-rear direction. The position where the second big winning hole 266 is formed is a position lower than the first special electric winning device 261 and the first through gate 263, and is a position vertically below the first big winning hole 265. In addition, the position where this second big prize opening 266 is formed is a position closer to the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3, but to the right of the second through gate 264.

A second special winning prize device 262 is provided to prevent or allow the game ball to enter the second big prize opening 266. The second special electric winning device 262 includes a second guide plate 281 provided below the second large winning opening 266 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front and back direction. The second guide plate 281 is provided so as to be movable in the front and rear directions by being driven by a drive means (not shown), and is set at a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized. , and a guiding position, which is a position where the pachinko machine 10 is slid forward from the blocking position and where the amount of protrusion of the game board 24 from the board surface to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

In the game board 24, a second ball receiving part 282 is provided above the right end of the second guide plate 281, and further above the second special electric winning device 262 in the right area PA3, a first grand prize winning device is provided. A second guide nail group 268 is provided for guiding all the game balls that have flowed into the lower part of the first special electric winning device 261 without entering the opening 265 and the first through gate 263 to the second ball receiving part 282. (See Figure 78). The second guide nail group 268 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. All of the game balls flowing down below the first special electric winning device 261 in the right area PA3 are guided to the second ball receiving part 282 by the second guide nail group 268. The distance between the front end of the second ball receiving portion 282 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 is sloped downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game balls that have reached the upper surface of the second ball receiving portion 282 will flow down toward the front side of the Pachinko machine 10 due to their own weight.

When the second guide plate 281 is placed in the blocking position, similarly to the first guide plate 271, the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Large size. In this blocking position, the front end of the second guide plate 281 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the second ball receiving part 282. Therefore, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second ball receiving part 282 when the second guide plate 281 is placed at the blocking position basically passes through the space between the second ball receiving part 282 and the window panel 52. It will fall below the second ball receiving part 282. In addition, the game ball guided by the second guide nail group 268 bounces on the second ball receiving part 282, so that the second guide plate 281, which is disposed at the blocking position, is on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24. It is also assumed that it will rest on the upper surface of the area that protrudes from the surface. On the other hand, the upper surface of the area of the second guiding plate 281 disposed at the blocking position that protrudes toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24 is sloped downward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. . Therefore, even if a game ball lands on the upper surface of the second guide plate 281 located at the blocking position, the game ball does not enter the second grand prize opening 266 or the second through gate 264 and is placed on the second guide plate 281. It will fall below the second guide plate 281 from between the front end of the guide plate 281 and the window panel 52. With the above configuration, when the second guide plate 281 is placed at the blocking position, winnings to the second large winning opening 266 are prevented from occurring and winnings to the second through gate 264 are also prevented from occurring. be done.

When the second guide plate 281 is placed at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the distance between the front end of the second guide plate 281 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. The dimensions are also small. In this guiding position, the front end of the second guiding plate 281 is located closer to the front of the Pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the second ball receiving part 282. Therefore, when the second guiding plate 281 is placed at the guiding position, a game ball that reaches the upper surface of the second ball receiving part 282 protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24 on the second guiding plate 281. It will be placed on top of the area where it is located.

On the upper surface of the protruding area 283 that protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24 when the second guiding plate 281 is placed at the guiding position, there is a boundary portion for changing the inclination direction of the upper surface. 284 is formed. With the boundary part 284 as a boundary, the upper surface of the protruding area 283 is connected to a first guiding area 285 existing in front of the second ball receiving part 282 and a second big winning area to the left of the first guiding area 285. It is divided into a second guide area 286 that continues to the mouth 266 and a third guide area 287 that is to the left of the first guide area 285 and in front of the second guide area 286 and continues to the second through gate 264. There is. The upper surface of the first guiding region 285 slopes downward toward the left. Further, the left end of the first guide region 285 is in contact with both the right end of the second guide region 286 and the right end of the third guide region 287. Thereby, the game ball guided from the second ball receiving part 282 to the first guiding area 285 flows down to the second guiding area 286 or the third guiding area 287 by its own weight. In this case, the range where the left end of the first guide area 285 is in contact with the right end of the second guide area 286 is wider than the range where the left end of the first guide area 285 is in contact with the right end of the third guide area 287. Therefore, the game ball guided by the first guide area 285 flows into the second guide area 286 more easily than the third guide area 287. However, the game balls guided by the first guide area 285 flow into the third guide area 287 at a predetermined frequency (for example, one out of seven balls).

The second guiding area 286 has an upper surface sloped downwardly toward the rear left so as to guide the game balls placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 286 to the second big prize opening 266. As a result, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the second guiding area 286 are likely to enter the second grand prize opening 266. The game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 266 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second big winning hole 266. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 specifies whether or not there is a winning in the second big winning hole 266 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In a round game in which the second big prize opening 266 is to be opened or in an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result, it is specified that one game ball has entered the second big prize opening 266. If so, the value of the winning counter in the main side RAM 65 is decremented by 1. When the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", it is determined that a prize corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes has been won as in the first embodiment, and the opening/closing execution mode is activated based on the round game or small winning result. Terminate it.

The third guide area 287 slopes downward toward the left. Here, when the second guide plate 281 is arranged at the guide position, the second guide plate 281 exists from the right end of the right area PA3 to the right end of the second through gate 264 in the lateral position. I will do it. Moreover, as already explained, the distance dimension between the front end of the second guide plate 281 disposed at the guide position and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, unless the game ball placed on the upper surface of the third guiding area 287 moves to the second guiding area 286 for some reason on the way, it will flow down toward the second through gate 264 due to its own weight, and will flow down to the second through gate 264. You will win a prize. The game ball that has entered the second through gate 264 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the second through gate 264. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not there is a prize in the second through gate 264 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. When it is determined that one game ball has entered the second through gate 264, on the condition that the holding information of the upper limit number of playing balls on the playing ball side is not stored in the playing ball holding area 65c, Numerical information of the random number counter C4 is stored in the common figure holding area 65c as the pending information on the common figure side.

With the above configuration, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a round game in which the second special electric winning device 262 is the control target or a small winning result in which the second special electric prize winning device 262 is the control target, the second guide plate 281 is When placed in the guiding position, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 is guided to either the second big prize opening 266 or the second through gate 264, and the game ball enters the second big prize opening 266 or the second through gate 264. You are guaranteed to win one of them. When a winning occurs in the second big winning opening 266, the remaining number of winning maximum balls is subtracted by 1 and a specific number of 15 game balls are paid out in the same way as in the first embodiment. Ru. When a prize is won in the second through gate 264, an opportunity to acquire reservation information on the common map side occurs. As a result, when the second special electric winning device 262 becomes the control target, the player can be aware of both that a winning will occur in the second large winning opening 266 and that a winning will occur in the second through gate 264. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 will be compared with reference to FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b). As already explained, FIG. 80(a) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 78, showing the second special electric winning device 262 when the second guiding plate 281 is placed at the guiding position, and FIG. 80(b) is a sectional view taken along the line 78A-A, showing the first special electric winning device 261 when the first guide plate 271 is placed at the guide position.

As shown in FIGS. 80(a) and 80(b), the dimensions of the left end of the first guiding region 275 on the first guiding plate 271 and the dimensions of the left end of the first guiding region 275 on the second guiding plate 281 are the same. or are substantially the same. In this case, the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guiding region 277 is in contact with the entire left end of the first guiding region 275 on the first guiding plate 271 is This is larger than the ratio of the range in which the right end of the third guiding region 287 is in contact with the entire left end. In relation to this configuration, when the first special electric winning device 261 is in the open state (that is, when the first guidance board 271 is placed in the guidance position), the game that is placed on the top surface of the first guidance board 271 The probability that a ball is guided to the first through gate 263 is determined by the probability that the ball is guided to the first through gate 263 when the second special electric winning device 262 is in the open state (that is, when the second guide plate 281 is placed at the guiding position). This is higher than the probability that the game ball placed on the top surface will be guided to the second through gate 264. Conversely, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is in the open state (that is, when the first guiding plate 271 is placed in the guiding position), the game ball placed on the top surface of the first guiding plate 271 wins the first grand prize. The probability of being guided to the opening 265 is that when the second special electric winning device 262 is in the open state (that is, when the second guiding plate 281 is placed in the guiding position), the probability that the game is guided to the top of the second guiding plate 281 is This is lower than the probability that the ball will be guided to the second grand prize opening 266. As a result, depending on the type of the special electric winning device that is the target of control among the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262, the ease of winning in the big winning openings 265 and 266 and the through gate 263 , 264 can be made to differ in the likelihood of winning a prize.

As already explained, the first guiding nail group 267 is provided above the first special electric winning device 261, and the first guiding nail group 267 is located from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the front of the first ball receiving part 272. (See FIG. 78). On the other hand, the first through gate 263 is provided at a position below the first guiding nail group 267 and to the left of the first special electric winning device 261 in the right side area PA3. Therefore, the game balls flowing into the right area PA3 do not pass through the area where the first special electric winning device 261 is provided and do not enter the first through gate 263.

On the other hand, a second guiding nail group 268 provided between the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 directs the game balls flowing below the first special electric winning device 261 into the second ball receiving part 282. However, the second guide nail group 268 does not enter the first through gate 263 side from the left end of the first special electric winning device 261 (see FIG. 78). A second through gate 264 is provided at a position vertically below the first through gate 263, and the first through gate 263 is configured such that a game ball passes through a gate hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. Therefore, the game ball that entered the first through gate 263 can also enter the second through gate 264, and not only that, but the game ball that entered the first through gate 263 is likely to enter the second through gate 264. When one game ball enters the first through gate 263 and also enters the second through gate 264, the normal game ball is played on the condition that the holding information of the upper limit number of normal balls is not acquired in the normal ball holding area 65c. Two pieces of pending information on the drawing side are acquired. Therefore, from this point of view as well, it is easier to acquire the reservation information on the regular card side when the first special electric winning device 261 is the controlled object than when the second special electric winning device 262 is the controlled object.

Next, the contents of the validity table in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81. FIG. 81(a) shows the low probability correctness table for the first special pattern, FIG. 81(b) shows the high probability correctness table for the first special pattern, and FIG. 81(c) shows the high probability correctness table for the second special pattern. A low probability correctness table is shown, and FIG. 81(d) shows a high probability correctness table for the second special symbol.

As in the first embodiment, the first special figure winning/failure table includes a low probability winning/failure table for the first special figure and a first special drawing winning/failure table as shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b). A high probability correct/failure table is provided. Only the jackpot results and miss results are set as game results in the low probability winning/failure table for the first special symbol and the high probability winning/falsifying table for the first special symbol, and the high probability winning/falsifying table for the first special symbol. The probability that a jackpot result will be selected is set higher in this table than in the low probability table for the first special symbol.

As in the first embodiment, the second special figure winning/failure table includes a low probability winning/failure table for the second special figure and a second special figure winning/failure table as shown in FIGS. 81(c) and 81(d). A high probability correct/failure table is provided. A jackpot result, a first small win result, and a second small win result are set as game results in the low probability win/fail table for the second special symbol and the high probability win/fail table for the second special symbol. . The probability that a jackpot result will be selected is set higher in the high probability probability table for the second special symbol than in the low probability probability table for the second special symbol. On the other hand, the probability that either the first small winning result or the second small winning result will be selected is set higher in the low probability correctness table for the second special symbol than in the high probability correctness table for the second special symbol. ing.

Next, the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode will be explained. FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution mode of the opening/closing execution mode.

In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the jackpot results are as shown in FIG. 82(a): 2R low probability result, 2R high probability result, 4R low probability result, 4R high probability result, 6R There are low-certain results, 6R high-certain results, 10R low-certain results, 10R high-certain results, 16R low-certain results, and 16R high-certain results. In the case of each of these jackpot results, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winnings in the round game, the opening duration period and the interval period of each round game are the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the types of special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the opening/closing execution mode are different depending on the type of jackpot result. Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by any of the 2R high-accuracy results, 4R high-accuracy results, 6R high-accuracy results, 10R high-accuracy results, and 16R high-accuracy results, the first special electric winning device is activated in each round game. 261 is the control target, whereas in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by any of the 2R low-probability result, 4R low-probability result, 6R low-probability result, 10R low-probability result, and 16R low-probability result, each round game is The second special electric prize winning device 262 becomes the control target. As a result, it is easier to acquire the reservation information on the ordinary figure side in the opening/closing execution mode when the result is highly accurate than when the result is low. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode, it is more difficult to win a prize in the big winning openings 265, 266 when the result is high than when the result is low.

Here, the open duration period of each round game is set to 29 seconds, and the upper limit number of prizes to be won for each round game is set to 10. In this case, since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, about 48 game balls can be supplied to the position of the first special electric winning device 261 before the open duration period of each round game has elapsed. On the other hand, as already explained, three game balls out of the four game balls guided to the first guidance area 275 of the first guidance plate 271 in the first special electric winning device 261 enter the first big prize opening 265. One game ball enters the first through gate 263. Then, 36 pieces, which is 3/4 of the 48 pieces, are calculated to be guided to the first big winning hole 265, and this number is larger than the upper limit number of winning pieces. Therefore, even if the first special electric winning device 261 becomes the control target, the upper limit number of winning game balls can be won in the first big winning hole 265 in each round game. By the way, in each round game, the period during which the guiding plates 271, 281 of the special electric winning devices 261, 262 are held at the guiding position, the game balls that have reached the ball receivers 272, 282 are guided to the corresponding through gates 263, 264. The period is set to be longer than the minimum period required from when the game ball reaches the ball receiving portions 272, 282 until it starts to fall from the left end of the guide plate 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gate 263, 264. has been done.

As already explained, in this embodiment, as the small winning result, the first small winning result and the second small winning result are set as shown in FIG. 82(b). In the case of these small winning results, the upper limit number of winnings, opening duration period, number of openings, and interval period in the opening/closing execution mode are all the same. On the other hand, the types of special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 to be controlled in the opening/closing execution mode are different depending on the type of small winning result. Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the first small winning result, the first special electric winning device 261 is controlled, whereas in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second small winning result, the second special electric winning device 261 is controlled. The winning device 262 becomes the control target. As a result, it is easier to acquire the reservation information on the regular figure side in the opening/closing execution mode when the first small winning result is obtained than when the second small winning result is obtained. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode, it is more difficult to win a prize in the big winning openings 265, 266 when the first small winning result is obtained than when the second small winning result is obtained. By the way, during each opening of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result, the period during which the guidance plates 271, 281 of the special electric prize winning devices 261, 262 are held at the guidance position is the period when the game balls that have reached the ball receivers 272, 282 When the game ball is guided to the corresponding through gate 263, 264, the game ball reaches the ball receiving part 272, 282 and then starts falling from the left end of the guiding plate 271, 281 toward the corresponding through gate 263, 264. The period is set to be longer than the minimum period required.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the special power release setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The opening setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special train start process (FIG. 42) and step S1810 of the special train closed process (FIG. 44).

First, it is determined whether the current control target is the first special electric prize winning device 261 (step S4001). If the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by one of the high probability results or the first small winning result, the first special electric winning device 261 is the control target, and the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by one of the low probability results or the first small winning result. When the second small winning result is the trigger, the second special electric prize winning device 262 is the control target.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, an opening setting process for the first special electric prize winning device 261 is executed (step S4002). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the driving means of the first special electric prize winning device 261 so that the first guiding plate 271 of the first special electric winning device 261 is placed at the guiding position. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4001, an opening setting process for the second special electric winning device 262 is executed (step S4003). Specifically, a drive signal is transmitted to the driving means of the second special electric prize winning device 262 so that the second guide plate 281 of the second special electric winning device 262 is placed at the guiding position. As a result, the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 corresponding to the jackpot result or small win result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode are brought into an open state.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the special electric prize winning devices 261, 262 are in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the through gates 263, 264, so when the special electric winning devices 261, 262 are in the open state, the game ball can enter the through gates 263, 264. The player expects to win both the special prize winning devices 261 and 262 and the through gates 263 and 264. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a situation where the special electric winning devices 261 and 262 are in the open state.

Through gates 263 and 264 are game balls that are placed on guide plates 271 and 272 that are placed at guide positions, and that are game balls that have flowed down on the guide plates 271 and 272 to a side different from the big prize openings 265 and 266 side. It is located at a position where the ball can enter. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game balls placed on the guide boards 271 and 272, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game balls flowing into the right side area PA3 are guided to the right end side of the guide plates 271, 272 by the guide nail groups 267, 268. In this case, the big prize openings 265, 266 and the through gates 263, 264 are provided on the left side of the guide plates 271, 272. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the way the game balls flow down on the guide plates 271, 272.

The area on the guide plates 271, 272 that allows the game ball to enter the through gates 263, 264 is to the left of the big prize openings 265, 266, that is, beyond the downstream direction of the game ball on the guide plates 271, 272. exists on the side. As a result, the player feels disadvantaged when the game ball placed on the guiding boards 271, 272 does not enter the grand prize openings 265, 266, and conversely, the winnings in the through gates 263, 264 occur. It becomes possible to change this to a sense of profit.

A first special electric prize winning device 261 and a second special electric prize winning device 262 are provided as the special electric winning devices 261 and 262, and a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264 are provided as the through gates 263 and 264. There is. Then, by being guided by the first guide plate 271 of the first special electric winning device 261, it becomes possible to win the first through gate 263, and by being guided by the second guiding plate 272 of the second special electric winning device 262. It becomes possible to win at the second through gate 264. In this case, by differentiating the types of special electric winning devices 261 and 262 that are targets of execution of opening and closing control in the opening and closing execution mode, the percentage of game balls entering each of the special electric winning devices 261 and 262 and the through gates 263 and 264 can be increased. It becomes possible to make the difference between the two.

The probability that a game ball placed on the first guide plate 271 will enter the first through gate 263 is different from the probability that a game ball placed on the second guide plate 272 will enter the second through gate 264. . This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special electric prize winning devices 261 and 262 that are the targets of execution of the opening/closing control.

For example, the types of the special electric winning devices 261 and 262 that are targets for execution of opening/closing control in the opening/closing execution mode are different between the 2R low accuracy result and the 2R high accuracy result. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the type of game result that triggers the execution of the opening/closing execution mode.

The second through gate 264 exists on the downstream side of the first through gate 263 in the flowing direction of the game ball. As a result, when the first special electric prize winning device 261 is subject to opening/closing control, not only can a game ball enter the first through gate 263, but also a game ball can enter the second through gate 264. You will get it. Therefore, a player who expects that the reservation information on the common map side will be acquired will expect that the first special electric prize winning device 261 will be the target of execution of the opening/closing control.

Regardless of whether a game ball enters the first through gate 263 or a game ball enters the second through gate 264, the same benefit of obtaining reservation information on the general figure side is given. This makes it possible to suppress the feeling of disadvantage felt by the player, regardless of which of the first special electric winning device 261 and the second special electric winning device 262 is to be subjected to the opening/closing control.

<Another form of the 15th embodiment>
- The type of special electric prize winning device 261, 262 to be subjected to opening/closing control may be changed during one opening/closing execution mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the ratio of ball entry expectations between the big prize openings 265, 266 and the through gates 263, 264 during the opening/closing execution mode.

- The game ball that entered the first through gate 263 is not limited to the configuration where it can enter the second through gate 264, and the game ball that entered the first through gate 263 can enter the second through gate 264. A configuration may also be adopted in which the game ball cannot enter the second through gate 264 and the game ball cannot enter the first through gate 263.

-Although the configuration is such that a member that directly opens and closes the big winning openings 265 and 266 is not provided, a configuration may be provided in which a member that directly opens and closes the big winning openings 265 and 266 is provided. For example, when the first guiding plate 271 is placed in the blocking position, the first guiding plate 271 is opposed to the first big winning opening 265 at a position close to the first big winning opening 265 so as to block the first big winning opening 265 from the front. 271 is placed at the guiding position, the part on the first guiding plate 271 that does not obstruct the flow of game balls toward the first big prize opening 265 or the first through gate 263 is the first guiding position. It may also be configured to be provided on the plate 271. In this case, it becomes possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first big prize opening 265 in a situation where the first guiding plate 271 is placed in the blocking position.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32, and when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while a game ball is placed on the guide plate part 214. However, in this embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided below the special electric winning device 32, but two special electric winning devices 32 are arranged vertically. It is set up. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate 35 is provided in the left side area PA2 of the game area PA, and when comparing the same firing operation in which the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the through gate 35 is provided in the left side area PA2. The frequency of game balls entering the game is constant regardless of the game state. Further, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, the game ball can reach the position where the second operating port 34 is provided. Therefore, when a game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side area PA2, it becomes possible to win a prize in the through gate 35, and further, the second operating port 34 opens as a result of winning in the through gate 35. When the state is reached, it becomes possible to win a prize through the second operating port 34.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as support modes for controlling the state of the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency that the general electric accessory 34a is not in the open state or the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state is relatively low, and in the high-frequency support mode, the frequency that the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state is relatively low. Relatively high. If the result is low, the support mode after opening/closing execution mode becomes low-frequency support mode, and if the result is high, the support mode after opening/closing execution mode becomes high-frequency support mode. .

In the right area PA3, two special electric prize winning devices 32 are arranged vertically in parallel. These special electric prize winning devices 32 are equipped with a passage forming body 201, an opening/closing member 202, and a guide member 203 as in the first embodiment. When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the game ball cannot enter the fourth discharge passage 45 and cannot pass through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) formed in the opening/closing member 202. The game balls will flow down below the special electric winning device 32. When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, a game ball can be placed on the guide plate part 214 of the opening/closing member 202, and the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 is placed in the fourth discharge passage. He will be able to join Team 45. In the following explanation, the upper special electric winning device 32 will be referred to as a first special electric winning device 291, and the lower special electric winning device 32 will be referred to as a second special electric winning device 292.

The first special electric winning device 291 extends above the second special electric winning device 292 from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the gaming area PA. In the right area PA3, on the upstream side of the first special electric prize winning device 291, a guide nail group 241 is provided as in the first embodiment. As a result, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is guided by the guide nail group 241 to the receiving part 231 of the guide member 203 in the first special electric winning device 291. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening/closing member 202. In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is placed in the open position and the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 is placed in the first special electric winning device 291. Flowing downward of the special electric winning device 291 is basically prevented, and when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is placed in the closed position and the first special electric winning device 291 is in the closed state, , the game balls flowing into the right side area PA3 are allowed to flow down below the first special electric winning device 291.

The second special electric prize winning device 292 extends from the right end of the variable display unit 36 to the right end of the gaming area PA. A lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 in the right area PA3. The lower guiding nail group 293 connects the first special electric winning device 291 from the path forming body 201 side to guide the game balls flowing below the first special electric winning device 291 to the right end side of the second special electric winning device 292. It is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b downward to the right over the right end side of the 2 special electric winning device 292. As a result, the game balls flowing below the first special electric winning device 291 are guided to the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 in the second special electric winning device 292 by the lower guiding nail group 293. Then, the game ball guided to the receiving portion 231 reaches the right end of the opening/closing member 202. In this case, when the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric winning device 292 is placed in the open position and the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 When the flow downward of the special electric winning device 292 is basically prevented, and the opening/closing member 202 of the second special electric winning device 292 is placed in the closed position, and the second special electric winning device 292 is in the closed state. , the game balls flowing into the right side area PA3 are allowed to flow down below the second special electric winning device 292.

FIG. 85(a) is a flowchart showing the special power release setting process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the special electric line opening setting process is executed in step S1608 of the special electric line start process (FIG. 42) and step S1810 of the special electric line closed process (FIG. 44).

In the opening setting process for special electricity, first, the opening setting process for the first special electricity winning device 291 is executed (step S4101). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed to set the first special electric prize winning device 291 to be in the opening state. Further, the process of setting the release of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is subsequently executed (step S4102). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed to set the second special electric prize winning device 292 to the opening state. As a result, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 become open at the same time or substantially simultaneously. In other words, in this embodiment, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result, at the start of each round game, and if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small winning result, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the opening/closing winning device 291, 292. At the start, both the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are in an open state.

FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing the special electric power closing setting process executed by the main CPU 63. The closing setting process for the special electric line is executed in step S1704 of the special electric line opening process (FIG. 43).

In the closing setting process for the special electric line, first, the closing setting process of the first special electric prize winning device 291 is executed (step S4201). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed to cause the first special electric prize winning device 291 to be in a closed state. Further, the closing setting process of the second special electric prize winning device 292 is subsequently executed (step S4202). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed to cause the second special electric prize winning device 292 to be in a closed state. As a result, the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are brought into a closed state simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. That is, in this embodiment, if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result, at the end of each round game, and if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small winning result, the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the opening/closing winning device 291, 292. At the end, both the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are in a closed state.

Incidentally, although explanations with illustrations are omitted, in the special electric line opening process (FIG. 43), if a game ball is won in either the first special electric winning device 291 or the second special electric winning device 292, in step S1706 Make a positive judgment. In this case, if a winning occurs in the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 at the same time, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 2 in step S1707, and the winning occurs in either one. If so, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1707. In addition, in the special line closed process (FIG. 44), if the result is a small hit and the game ball has won in either the first special line winning device 291 or the second special line winning device 292, the process proceeds to step S1801. Make a positive judgment. In this case, if a winning occurs in the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 at the same time, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 2 in step S1802, and a winning occurs in either one. If so, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802.

Next, the manner in which the first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are opened and closed will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 86. 86(a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 86(b) shows the period when the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, and FIG. 86(c) shows the period when the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state. FIG. 86(d) shows the period in which the open state is reached, and FIG. Indicates the expected minimum period of time required.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the round game is executed from timing t1 to timing t2, from timing t3 to timing t5, and from timing t6 to timing t8. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 86(b) and 86(c), both the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 simultaneously operate at the timing of t1, the timing of t3, and the timing of t6. It becomes an open state, and both the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 simultaneously become closed at the timing of t2, the timing of t5, and the timing of t8.

In this configuration, it is assumed that the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 at timing t2 and timing t5 when the first special electric winning device 291 is in the closed state. be done. This game ball falls downward without winning the first special electric winning device 291. In this case, the minimum period assumed as the period required for the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 to reach the guiding plate part 214 of the second special electric winning device 292 is The distance between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 is set so that the period is longer than the interval period between one opening of the winning devices 291, 292 and the next opening. has been done. In addition, as already explained, a lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, and the game balls flowing into the lower part of the first special electric winning device 291 are By descending the slope on the lower guide nail group 293 under its own weight, it reaches the position of the second special electric winning device 292. As a result, the period required for the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 to reach the guiding plate part 214 of the second special electric winning device 292 is longer than when the game ball falls vertically. It has been going on for a long time.

With the above configuration, the game ball that falls from the guide plate part 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 toward the second special electric winning device 292 at the timing t2 is shown in FIGS. 86(c) and 86(d). As shown, the second special electric winning device 292 is reached at timing t4, which is later than timing t3 when the second special electric winning device 292 becomes open again. In addition, the game ball that fell from the guide plate part 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 toward the second special electric winning device 292 at the timing t5, as shown in FIGS. 86(c) and 86(d), The second special electric prize winning device 292 is reached at timing t7, which is later than the timing t6 when the second special electric winning device 292 becomes open again.

In each round game, when the first special electric winning device 291 is in the closed state, the maximum number of game balls placed on the guide plate section 214 of the first special electric winning device 291 is about two, which is less than the upper limit number of winnings. . Therefore, the second special electric winning device 292 will not be in the closed state before the game ball that has fallen from the first special electric winning device 291 enters the second special electric winning device 292.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction in the right side area PA3, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are A period occurs in which both the special electric prize winning device 292 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are in an open state. As a result, game balls that have failed to enter the first special electric winning device 291 which is in the open state can enter the second special electric winning device 292 which is in the open state. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes difficult for balls to leak into the special electric prize winning devices 291, 292.

Even though the game ball had reached the position of the first special electric winning device 291 at the timing when each open round ended, it was not possible to enter the first special electric winning device 291. The first special line winning device 291 and the second special line winning device 292 are provided so that balls can be entered into the second special line winning device 292 . As a result, game balls that have failed to enter the first special electric winning device 291 in a predetermined opening time can enter the second special electric winning device 292 in the next opening time, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric winning device 291, This makes it difficult for the ball to miss the 292 ball.

The period from the end of a predetermined opening cycle to the start of the next opening cycle in the first opening/closing execution mode is such that the game ball reaches the position of the second special electricity winning device 292 from the position of the first special electricity winning device 291. The period is set to be shorter than the period required to complete the process. As a result, game balls that fail to enter the first special electric winning device 291 in a predetermined open round can enter the second special electric winning device 292 in the next open round. Further, it is possible to realize a configuration that makes it difficult for such ball entry leakage to occur by adjusting the positional relationship between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292.

In the above configuration, when the opening/closing member 202 of the first special electric winning device 291 is placed in the open position, the flow of game balls to the downstream side of the opening/closing member 202 is prevented, and the second special electric winning prize When the opening/closing member 202 of the device 292 is placed in the open position, the game balls are prevented from flowing downstream from the opening/closing member 202. When each opening round starts, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 are simultaneously in the open state, and when each opening round ends, the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 become open. The prize winning device 292 simultaneously enters the closed state. This makes it possible to suppress the number of game balls that are ejected to the outlet 24a without winning in the special electric winning devices 291, 292 in the opening/closing execution mode.

The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are configured to be opened and closed at the same time. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while suppressing an increase in the processing load for controlling the opening and closing of these special electric prize winning devices 291 and 292.

<Another form of the 16th embodiment>
- The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which they are opened at the same time at the start of each opening round, and although the timing of the opening states is slightly different, they can be distinguished by appearance. It may be possible to have a configuration in which they are substantially the same to the extent that it is difficult to do so, or it may be a configuration in which the timings at which they become open are different to the extent that they can be visually distinguished. In this configuration, in order to cause game balls that have missed entering the first special electric winning device 291 to enter the second special electric winning device 292, the timing at which the second special electric winning device 292 becomes open is the same as the timing when the second special electric winning device 292 becomes open. Preferably, the timing is earlier than the timing at which the device 291 becomes open.

・The first special electric prize winning device 291 and the second special electric prize winning device 292 are not limited to the configuration in which they are closed at the same time at the end of each opening cycle, and although the timing of the closing conditions is slightly different, they can be distinguished by appearance. The configuration may be such that they are substantially the same to the extent that it is difficult to do so, or the timing of the closed state may be different to the extent that they can be visually distinguished.

- When the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, a configuration may be adopted in which the game balls flowing down the right side area PA3 are reliably prevented from flowing down to the downstream side of the first special electric winning device 291. For example, the opening/closing member 202 has a plate shape without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is connected to the game board. The opening/closing member 202 may be recessed behind the board surface of the game board 24 and extend between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52 when the game board 24 is placed in the open position. As a result, when the first special electric winning device 291 is in the open state, except for the game ball that is on the opening/closing member 202 at the timing when the first special electric winning device 291 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side The game ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win a prize in the first special electric prize winning device 291.

In addition to or in place of the configuration, when the second special electric winning device 292 is in an open state, it is certain that the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 flows downstream from the second special electric winning device 292. It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is prevented. For example, the opening/closing member 202 has a plate shape without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is connected to the game board. The opening/closing member 202 may be recessed behind the board surface of the game board 24 and extend between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52 when the game board 24 is placed in the open position. As a result, when the second special electric winning device 292 is in the open state, except for the game ball that is on the opening/closing member 202 at the timing when the second special electric winning device 292 switches from the open state to the closed state, the right side The game ball flowing down the area PA3 will surely win a prize in the second special electric prize winning device 292.

- It is not limited to the configuration in which the lower guide nail group 293 is provided between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292, and the lower guiding nail group 293 is not provided. It may also be a configuration. Even in this case, the distance between the first special electric winning device 291 and the second special electric winning device 292 is such that the game ball reaches the position of the second special electric winning device 292 from the position of the first special electric winning device 291. By setting the minimum period of time required to reach the first special electric winning device 291, 292 to be longer than the interval period between the opening times of each special electric winning device 291, 292, game balls that have not entered the first special electric winning device 291 can be transferred to the second special electric winning device 291. It becomes possible to enter the ball into the special electric prize winning device 292.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in the configuration for making all the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 in the opening/closing execution mode win the special electric winning device. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as those of the sixteenth embodiment will be basically omitted. Further, in this embodiment, there are no small winning results.

FIG. 87 is a longitudinal sectional view of the game board 24 for explaining the configuration of the special electric winning devices 301 and 302 in this embodiment.

In the right side area PA3 of the game board 24, a first special electric winning device 301 and a second special electric winning device 302 are arranged vertically in parallel. Each special electric winning device 301, 302 is equipped with a grand prize opening 301a, 302a into which a game ball can enter, and also has opening/closing doors 301b, 302b for opening and closing the grand prize opening 301a, 302a. The opening/closing doors 301b, 302b can be switched between an open position and a closed position by being driven by special electric drive units 301c, 302c. When the opening/closing doors 301b, 302b are placed in the closed position, the game balls cannot enter the grand prize openings 301a, 302a, and when the opening/closing doors 301b, 302b are placed in the open position, the grand prize is won. Game balls can enter the mouths 301a and 302a. The game balls that have entered the big prize openings 301a and 302a are detected by detection sensors 301d and 302d. Even in this embodiment, as in the sixteenth embodiment, both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state at the same time when the round game starts, and when the round game ends, the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the open state. Both the winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in the closed state at the same time.

In addition, although illustration is omitted in this embodiment, when the first special electric prize winning device 301 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed into the right side area PA3 is ensured to win the first special electric prize winning device 301. In the right side area PA3, an area upstream of the first special electric winning device 301 is set. In addition, if the second special electric winning device 302 is in the open state at that time, the game ball that has flown down to the bottom of the first special electric winning device 301 is placed in the right side area so that it will surely win the second special electric winning device 302. In PA3, an area between the first special electric prize winning device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 is set.

A flow prevention member 303 is provided between the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 in the right side area PA3. The flow prevention member 303 is driven by the prevention drive unit 304 and is movable between a retracted position where it does not protrude forward from the board surface of the game board 24 and a blocking position where it projects forward from the board surface of the game board 24. ing. When the flow-down prevention member 303 is arranged at the retreat position, the game ball that has flown down to the lower part of the first special electric winning device 301 is directed toward the second special electric winning device 302 without being obstructed by the flow-down prevention member 303. Flowing down. On the other hand, when the flow-down prevention member 303 is arranged at the blocking position, all the game balls that have flown down to the lower part of the first special electric winning device 301 are placed on the upper surface of the flow-down prevention member 303, and the second special electric winning device 302 It is prevented from flowing down to the side.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the flow prevention control process executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the flow prevention control process is repeatedly executed in the opening/closing execution mode.

If the current round game is a round game different from the last round game (step S4301: YES), and the blocking start period (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the current round game. (Step S4302: YES), a drive control process for starting blocking is executed (Step S4303). Thereby, the flow prevention member 303 is placed from the retracted position to the prevention position. In addition, the blocking start period is set to a period shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of prizes for each round game (specifically 10 pieces). , the round game will not end before the blocking start period has elapsed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4301, if a negative determination is made in step S4302, or if the process in step S4303 is executed, the blocking end period (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the round game. It is determined whether or not (step S4304). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4304, a drive control process for ending the blocking is executed (step S4305). As a result, the flow prevention member 303 is placed from the blocking position to the retracted position. Note that the blocking end period is set to be shorter than the blocking starting period.

Next, the relationship between the open/closed state of each special electric winning device 301, 302 and the operating position of the flow prevention member 303 will be explained. FIG. 89 is a time chart for explaining this relationship. FIG. 89(a) shows the execution period of the round game, FIG. 89(b) shows the period when the first special electric winning device 301 is in the open state, and FIG. 89(c) shows the period when the second special electric winning device 302 is in the open state. FIG. 89(d) shows a period in which the flow prevention member 303 is in the blocking position. Further, FIGS. 90(a) to 90(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the open/closed states of each special electric winning device 301, 302 and the operating position of the flow prevention member 303. In addition, the case of the opening/closing execution mode in which a round game occurs three times will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the first round game is executed at timing t1. At the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are simultaneously brought into the open state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(c), both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in an open state, and the flow prevention member 303 is placed in the retracted position.

At timing t2, which is the timing at which the blocking start period has elapsed from timing t1 when the first round game was started, the flow blocking member 303 is moved from the retracted position to the blocking position as shown in FIG. 89(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(a), both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in an open state, and the flow prevention member 303 is placed in the blocking position.

Thereafter, the first round game ends at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 89(a). At the timing t3, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are simultaneously closed. However, even in this situation, the flow prevention member 303 remains in the blocking position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90(b), both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in a closed state, and the flow prevention member 303 is placed in the blocking position. As a result, the game balls that passed in front of the first special electric winning device 301 at the timing when the first special electric winning device 301 became in the closed state, and the game balls that passed in front of the first special electric winning device 301 during the interval period, are allowed to flow down. While resting on the upper surface of the blocking member 303, further flow down is prevented.

Thereafter, by starting the next round game as shown in FIG. 89(a) at the timing t4, the first special electric prize is won as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c) at the timing t4. The device 301 and the second special electric prize winning device 302 are simultaneously opened. In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(a), both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in an open state, and the flow prevention member 303 is placed in the blocking position.

Thereafter, when the blocking end period elapses after the round game is started at timing t5, the flow blocking member 303 is disposed from the blocking position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 89(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 90(c), both the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are in an open state, and the flow prevention member 303 is placed in the retracted position. As a result, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the flow prevention member 303 start flowing downward, and all of the game balls win prizes in the second special electric winning device 302.

Thereafter, the same operation as that from timing t2 to timing t5 is repeated from timing t6 to timing t9. Then, at timing t10, the last round game ends as shown in FIG. 89(a). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), the first special electric winning device 301 and the second special electric winning device 302 are simultaneously in the closed state. Further, as shown in FIG. 89(d), the flow prevention member 303 is placed at the retracted position.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, even if a ball leaks into the first special electric winning device 301, the flow of the leaked game ball to the downstream side is prevented by the flow prevention member 303. Then, when the second special electric winning device 302 is in the open state, the blocking by the flow-down prevention member 303 is released, and the game balls that have been blocked from flowing downstream by the flow-down prevention member 303 are released. The ball will be entered into the second special electric winning device 302. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of leakage of balls entering the special electric prize winning devices 301 and 302 in the opening/closing execution mode.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the position where the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 is provided. In addition, a ball entry section that serves as a trigger for acquiring reservation information on the general map side is provided in addition to the through gate 35. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 was provided in the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA, but in this embodiment, the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 was provided in the left area PA2 of the gaming area PA. A combination with a through gate 35 is provided. The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the same as that of the first embodiment, except that the left and right positional relationship is reversed. That is, the special electric winning device 32 extends from the left end of the left side area PA2 to the left end of the center frame 36a at a midway position in the vertical direction of the left side area PA2, and is a passage forming body in which the fourth discharge passage part 45 is formed. 201 is provided on the left frame portion 36d of the center frame 36a, and the receiving portion 231 of the guide member 203 is located at the left end of the left side area PA2. The upper surface of the guide plate portion 214 of the opening/closing member 202 is sloped downward toward the right. The game balls flowing down the left side area PA2 will reach the area where the special electric winning device 32 is provided, except for the game balls that enter the entrance part 36e of the warp passage.

In the left area PA2, a guiding nail group 241 is provided above the special electric winning device 32 by arranging a plurality of nails 24b. The guide nail group 241 flows into the left side area PA2 and guides the game ball to the receiving part 231 that did not enter the entrance part 36e of the warp passage. As a result, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 and reaching the special electric winning device 32 is first guided to the receiving part 231, and then reaches the left end of the opening/closing member 202. When the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the open position, the player can enter the fourth discharge passage section 45 by moving the upper surface of the guide plate section 214 of the opening/closing member 202 downward toward the right. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the water flows downward through the opening 213 (see FIG. 30) of the opening/closing member 202. Further, even when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with a game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214, the game ball flows down from the position where it is placed below the opening/closing member 202.

In the left area PA2, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 32 and at a position closer to the center frame 36a. Further, a regulating nail group 242 is provided between the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 for guiding game balls existing in a predetermined range on the right side on the guiding plate section 214 to the through gate 35. . As a result, when the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position in a situation where a game ball exists in a predetermined range on the right side on the guide plate section 214, the game ball enters the through gate 35. becomes. Then, when a winning occurs in the through gate 35, similarly to the first embodiment, on the condition that the reservation information on the upper limit number of coins is not stored in the reservation area 65c, side hold information is obtained.

In this embodiment, in addition to the through gate 35, an unexpected gate 311 is provided as a ball entry section that triggers the acquisition of reservation information on the general figure side. The burst gate 311 is provided above the guide nail group 241 in the left side area PA2. When a winning occurs in the sudden gate 311, as in the case where a winning occurs in the through gate 35, the reservation information on the upper limit number of ordinary figures is not stored in the ordinary figures holding area 65c. The reservation information on the general drawing side is acquired under the condition that. Note that the burst gate 311 has a vertically penetrating gate similar to the through gate 35, and is configured so that the winning game ball continues to flow down the gaming area PA, but it is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which the game ball that enters the sudden gate 311 is discharged to the back side of the game board 24 without any problem.

Here, a restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the sudden gate 311 to make it difficult for a player to win a prize at the sudden gate 311. Due to the provision of the restriction nail 312, the probability that a game ball flowing down the left area PA2 will win in the burst gate 311 is equal to the probability that a game ball supplied to the lower area PA4 will win in the first operating port 33. The probability is lower than that. In addition, the probability that a game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 enters the winning gate 311 is lower than the probability that a game ball flowing down below the special electric winning device 32 enters the general winning hole 31 in the left side area PA2. It has become. Furthermore, the probability that a game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will enter a prize in the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability that a game ball will win in the special electric winning device 32 when the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state. In addition, the probability is lower than the probability that a game ball enters the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the probability that a game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 enters a prize in the sudden gate 311 is higher than the probability that a game ball enters a prize in the second operating port 34 when the second operating port 34 is in an open state. The probability is low. For example, when 1000 game balls flow into the left area PA2, there is a probability that one game ball will win in the sudden gate 311.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the hold information on the general-purpose figure side is acquired, the general-purpose electric power release state is reliably generated using the hold information on the general-purpose figure side as a trigger. In other words, when a winning occurs in the through gate 35 or the sudden gate 311 and the reservation information on the common figure side is acquired, the second operating port 34 is surely opened after that. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of obtaining the reservation information on the general map side.

Even if the left side area PA2 is provided with the special electric winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the sudden gate 311 as described above, the condition is that the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 does not enter a prize in the special electric winning device 32. Flows into the lower area PA4 as a result. Then, the game ball that has flowed into the lower area PA4 can reach a winning position in the first operating port 33, and if the second operating port 34 is in an open state, it can win a prize in the second operating port 34. reach any possible position. In addition, it is possible to reach a winning position in the general winning opening 31. As a result, by continuing the firing operation of the game ball so as to flow down the left side area PA2, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35, and the sudden opening It becomes possible to aim for winnings for all of the gates 311.

On the other hand, the nail 24b is provided in the right area PA3, but no ball entry portion is provided. In addition, the game balls that have flown down the right side area PA3 flow into the lower area PA4, and the game balls that have flowed in can reach the position where the first operating port 33 can win, and the second operating port 34 is in an open state. If it is, the second operating port 34 can reach a position where it can win a prize. In this case, due to the fact that the ball entry section is not provided in the right area PA3 as described above, the firing operation is performed so that the ball flows down the right area PA3 rather than when the firing operation is performed so that the ball flows down the left area PA2. When this is done, winnings are more likely to occur in the second operating port 34 which is in the open state. As a result, if, for example, a winning occurs in the sudden gate 311 and the second operating port 34 suddenly opens, the game ball can be launched so as to flow down the right side area PA3. It becomes possible to easily cause winnings to occur in the second operating port 34.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating the processing for acquiring reservation information on the general map side, which is executed by the main CPU 63. It should be noted that the acquisition process of the reservation information on the general-purpose figure side is executed in step S1101 in the general-purpose figure/general electric power control process (FIG. 37).

If a winning has occurred in the through gate 35 (step S4401: YES), and the number of pending information on the general drawing side stored in the general drawing holding area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number (step S4402: YES) ), in order for the main side CPU 63 to grasp the number of unprocessed general figure side hold information stored in the general figure holding area 65c, the value of the general figure hold counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1. (Step S4403). Incidentally, the display content of the standard pattern reservation display section 38b in the standard pattern unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the standard pattern reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the standard pattern reservation display section 38b corresponds to the number of the standard pattern reservation information stored in the standard pattern reservation area 65c. Thereafter, the value of the standard random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the standard drawing reservation area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservation memories added by 1 in step S4403 (step S4404).

Thereafter, a general figure hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 81 (step S4405). When the audio/emission control device 81 receives the general figure hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . In the symbol display device 41, an image is displayed to notify the number of pending information on the common symbol side stored in the common symbol reservation area 65c, and the display control device 82 displays a command corresponding to the common symbol reservation command. By receiving the information, the content of the image display is updated to the content corresponding to the increase in the number of pending information on the general map side by one. In addition, when the variable display of the picture on the common picture display section 38a is started triggered by the pending information on the common picture side, the content of the image display corresponds to the fact that the number of pending information on the common picture side has decreased by one. The content will be updated.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 93(a). On the lower edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a first reservation display area 313 for notifying the number of first reservation information stored in the first special symbol reservation area 85, and a second special symbol display area 313 are provided. A second hold display area 314 for notifying the number of pieces of second hold information stored in the hold area 86 is set. In the first reservation display area 313, the same number of unit display areas as the number of first reservation information that can be stored in the first special figure reservation area 85 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and the number of first reservation information increases. Accordingly, the pending images 315 are sequentially displayed from the left unit display area, and as the number of first pending information decreases, the pending images 315 are sequentially erased from the right unit display area. Further, in the second reservation display area 314, the same number of unit display areas as the number of second reservation information that can be stored in the second special figure reservation area 86 are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and the number of second reservation information is As the number of reserved images 315 increases, the reserved images 315 are displayed sequentially from the left unit display area, and as the number of second pending information decreases, the reserved images 315 are sequentially erased from the right unit display area. By setting the first pending display area 313, it is possible to clearly grasp the number of first pending information through the display contents of the symbol display device 41, and also by setting the second pending display area 314. Therefore, the number of pieces of second pending information can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the symbol display device 41.

In the upper left corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, a general pattern holding display area 316 is set for notifying the number of holding information on the normal pattern side stored in the normal pattern holding area 65c. There is. In the general figure reservation display area 316, the same number of unit display areas as the number of general figure side pending information that can be stored in the general figure holding area 65c are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As the number of reserved images 315 increases, the reserved images 315 are displayed in order from the left unit display area, and as the number of reserved information on the general figure side decreases, the reserved images 315 are sequentially erased from the right unit display area. By setting the regular symbol reservation display area 316, the number of pending information on the regular symbol side can be clearly grasped through the display contents of the symbol display device 41.

In addition, the display control device 82 increases the number of pending images 315 to be displayed in the general pattern holding display area 316 by one when receiving a command corresponding to the general drawing holding command. In addition, the display control device 82 transmits a command from the voice light emission control device 81 based on a command indicating that the fluctuating display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display section 38a has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the voice light emission control device 81. When a command is received, the number of pending images 315 displayed in the general figure pending display area 316 is decreased by one.

Returning to the description of the reservation information acquisition process on the general map side (FIG. 92), if a negative determination is made in step S4401, if a negative determination is made in step S4402, or if the process in step S4405 is executed, On the condition that a winning has occurred in the sudden gate 311 (step S4406: YES), and furthermore, the number of pending information on the general drawing side stored in the general drawing holding area 65c is less than the upper limit storage number ( Step S4407: YES), 1 is added to the value of the general map holding counter in the main side RAM 65 (Step S4408). As already explained, the display content of the standard pattern reservation display section 38b in the standard pattern unit 38 is adjusted according to the value of the standard pattern reservation counter. Thereafter, the value of the standard random number counter C4 is stored in the first storage area of the standard drawing reservation area 65c, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservation memories added by 1 in step S4408 (step S4409).

After that, if the current state is the opening/closing execution mode (step S4410: YES), or if the value of the ordinary figure holding counter in the main side RAM 65 is 2 or more although the opening/closing execution mode is not, that is, the ordinary figure is placed in the ordinary figure holding area 65c. If two or more pieces of side hold information are stored (step S4410 and step S4411: NO), a general figure hold command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S4412). The processing contents of the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 in this case are the same as those in the case where the general figure hold command is transmitted in step S4405.

On the other hand, if the current state is not the opening/closing execution mode (step S4410: NO) and the value of the general drawing holding counter in the main side RAM 65 is "1", that is, the holding information of the general drawing side is 1 in the general drawing holding area 65c. If only one is stored (step S4411: YES), an unexpected hold command is sent to the audio emission control device 81 (step S4413). When the audio emission control device 81 receives the sudden hold command, it transmits a corresponding command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the command, it updates the display contents of the general pattern holding display area 316 in the same way as when it receives the command corresponding to the general drawing holding command. In addition, when the display control device 82 receives a command corresponding to the sudden command, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. A special notification image 317 is displayed that urges the user to perform a firing operation aimed at. By displaying the special notification image 317, the player performs a firing operation aimed at winning a prize at the second operating port 34, and it becomes possible to generate an opportunity to acquire the second reservation information.

When the timing for displaying the special notification image 317 is reached in a situation where a game repeat performance is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 82 displays an image in the upper right corner of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. A reduced display area 318 is set, and in the reduced display area 318, the effect of the game round is continued in a reduced state. This makes it possible to display the special notification image 317 in a predetermined size even if a sudden hold command is sent from the main CPU 63 while a game replay is being executed. It becomes possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the notification image 317.

Next, the manner in which the reservation information on the general map side is acquired will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 94. 94(a) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode, FIG. 94(b) shows the period when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, and FIG. 94(c) shows the occurrence of winning in the through gate 35. FIG. 94(d) shows the timing of occurrence of winning at the sudden gate 311, and FIG. 94(e) shows the timing at which the reservation information on the regular figure side is acquired.

At timing t1, which is a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, a winning occurs in the sudden gate 311 as shown in FIG. 94(d). As a result, as shown in FIG. 94(e) at the timing t1, the reservation information on the ordinary map side is acquired. The second operation port 34 is opened in response to this acquired reservation information on the general drawing side, and the second reservation information acquired based on the winning of the second operation port 34 in the open state is used for the game round. 94 (a), the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the second small win result is executed from timing t2 to timing t9 as shown in FIG. 94(a). . Here, in this embodiment, when the second small win result is obtained, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened is set to two.

In the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state from timing t3 to timing t4 and from timing t6 to timing t7, as shown in FIG. 94(b). In this case, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position while the game ball is placed on the guide plate portion 214 at each of the timing t4 and the timing t7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94(c), a winning occurs in the through gate 35 at each of the timings of t5 and t8, and at each of the timings of t5 and t8, as shown in FIG. 94(e). The pending information on the general map side is acquired. As a result, an opportunity arises for the second operating port 34 to become open again, and a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 that is in the open state, and the second reservation information is acquired, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a), the opening/closing execution mode occurs again from timing t10 to timing t16 triggered by the second small win result.

In the opening/closing execution mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state from timing t11 to timing t12 and from timing t13 to timing t14, as shown in FIG. 94(b). Further, at timing t14, the opening/closing member 202 moves from the open position to the closed position with the game ball placed on the guide plate portion 214. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 94(c), a prize is won in the through gate 35 at the timing t15, and at the timing t15, the reservation information on the regular figure side is acquired as shown in FIG. 94(e). As a result, an opportunity arises for the second operating port 34 to be in the open state again, and a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 that is in the open state, and the second pending information is acquired, which leads to the opening/closing execution mode. occurs.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in addition to the effects of the first embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

Even if the situation is not in the opening/closing execution mode, when a game ball enters the sudden gate 311, the reservation information on the regular game side is acquired and the second operating port 34 can be opened. Then, based on the game ball entering the second operating port 34 which is in the open state, the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34 not only in the opening/closing execution mode but also in the opening/closing execution mode.

A restriction nail 312 is provided on the upstream side of the sudden gate 311 so that the probability of a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of a game ball entering the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. ing. This makes it possible to suppress the probability that the opening/closing execution mode will occur based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not present. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not present.

Further, a restriction nail 312 is provided so that the probability of a game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is lower than the probability of a game ball entering the first operating port 33. From this point of view as well, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction that the transition to the opening/closing execution mode has occurred based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not present.

When a game ball enters the sudden gate 311 and the hold information on the regular figure side is acquired, and the second operating port 34 becomes open, the corresponding special notification image 317 is displayed on the symbol display device. 41. As a result, even though a game ball enters the sudden gate 311 and the second operating port 34 becomes open, the game ball enters the second operating port 34 without noticing it. It becomes possible to make it difficult for an event in which a ball opportunity is lost to occur.

In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible for a game ball to enter the through gate 35, so there is a high possibility that the player is conscious of the fact that the second operating port 34 is in the open state, but in the opening/closing execution mode, In a situation where no game ball enters the through gate 35, there is a possibility that the player is not conscious of the fact that the second operating port 34 is in the open state. In this case, the special notification image 317 is displayed when a game ball enters the sudden gate 311 and the hold information on the normal game side is acquired in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the fact that the operating port 34 is in the open state. Furthermore, by preventing the special notification image 317 from being displayed in the opening/closing execution mode in which the player is likely to be conscious of the second operating port 34 being in the open state, the special notification image 317 can be displayed. It is possible to prevent this from becoming a nuisance for the player.

A special notification image 317 is displayed when the reservation information on the regular game side is acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the sudden gate 311 in a situation where the reservation information on the regular game side is not acquired. This makes it possible to display the special notification image 317 in a situation where the player is less conscious of the fact that the second operating port 34 is in the open state.

A special electric winning device 32, a through gate 35, and a sudden gate 311 are provided in an area where a game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 or a game ball that has flown down can enter. This makes it possible to aim to win the special electric prize winning device 32, the through gate 35, and the sudden gate 311 using the same firing operation mode.

The game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is easier to reach the position of the second operating port 34 than the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2. As a result, when the second operating port 34 is in the open state in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side area PA3, and the game ball is sent to the second operating port 34. It becomes possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the ball.

<Another form of the 18th embodiment>
- The combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 and the sudden gate 311 may be set in a positional relationship such that if you aim to win one, you cannot aim to win the other. For example, the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be provided in the left area PA2, and the sudden gate 311 may be provided in the right area PA3, or the combination of the special electric winning device 32 and the through gate 35 may be configured. may be provided in the right area PA3, and the burst gate 311 may be provided in the left area PA2.

・The general electricity release lottery process is executed for the hold information on the general electricity supply side in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and if the general electricity release state is won, the general electricity release state is established and the second operating port 34 is opened. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the state is set. In this case, even if a game ball enters the sudden gate 311, a situation may occur in which the second operating port 34 does not open. In this configuration, the reservation information on the regular game side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the reservation information on the regular game side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311. may be treated separately, and the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery process may be different between the former reservation information on the ordinary electricity side and the latter reservation information on the ordinary electricity side.

For example, the hold information on the regular game side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is more common than the hold information on the regular game side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the general electricity release state is easily won in the electricity release lottery process. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the game ball entering the sudden gate 311.

On the other hand, the hold information on the general game side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311 is higher than the hold information on the general game side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35. A configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to win the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery process. In this case, since the probability that the normal electric current will be open when a game ball enters the sudden gate 311 is low, it is not necessary to lower the probability that the game ball enters the sudden gate 311.

・Distinguish between the hold information on the general game side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35 and the hold information on the general game side acquired based on the game ball enter the sudden gate 311. In addition to handling them separately, one of these pending information indicates that the second actuating port 34 is set to the normal electricity release state without executing the general electricity release lottery process, and the other information indicates that the general electricity release state is won in the general electricity release lottery process. It is good also as a structure where the 2nd operation port 34 becomes a normal current open state by becoming. For example, regarding the reservation information on the normal game side acquired based on the game ball entering the sudden gate 311, the normal electricity release lottery process is not executed and the second operation port 34 becomes the normal electricity release state. , regarding the hold information on the general power side acquired based on the game ball entering the through gate 35, the second operating port 34 is opened when the general power open state is won in the general power open lottery process. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the state is set. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the game ball entering the sudden gate 311.

・The probability of a ball entering the sudden gate 311 is the probability of a ball entering the general winning hole 31, the probability of ball entering the special electric winning device 32 that is in an open state, the probability of ball entering the first operating port 33, and the probability of ball entering the second operating port 34. It is not limited to a configuration that is lower than the probability of a ball entering the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. You can also use it as Furthermore, the sudden release gate 311 may have a higher probability of ball entry than the first operating port 33.

- Instead of the sudden burst gate 311, a second sudden action opening may be provided. In this case, the second sudden operating port is not provided with an opening/closing member that prevents or allows the game ball to enter the second sudden operating port, so that the second sudden operating port does not have an opening/closing member that prevents or allows the game ball to enter the second sudden operating port. The probability of a ball entering the ball does not change depending on the gaming state, and when a game ball enters the second sudden operation port, the same effect as when a game ball enters the second operation port 34 is adopted. The second pending information is obtained. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the opening/closing execution mode suddenly occurs when a game ball enters the second sudden operation opening.

In addition, in this configuration, the average fluctuation display period of the game times triggered by the second hold information acquired based on the game ball entering the second actuating port 34 is changed to the second actuating port 34. It may be configured such that the period is shorter than the average fluctuation display period of the game round triggered by the second reservation information acquired based on the ball being entered. This makes it possible to shorten the time required from when a game ball enters the second sudden operation port until the opening/closing execution mode is started.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, instead of the special line winning device 32, a special line winning device 321 is provided. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 95 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment.

In the right area PA3 of the gaming area PA, a special electric winning device 321 is provided in place of the special electric winning device 32. The special electric prize winning device 321 is provided at a midway position in the vertical direction of the right area PA3 over the entire horizontal direction. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 will surely pass through the area where the special electric winning device 321 is provided. Further, a through gate 35 is provided below the special electric winning device 321 in the right area PA3 and at a position near the variable display unit 36.

The configuration of the special electric prize winning device 321 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b). 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA in FIG. 95.

A grand prize opening 322 is formed in the game board 24 so as to pass through the game board 24 in the front-back direction. The position where the big prize opening 322 is formed is a position close to the variable display unit 36 in the right area PA3. A special electric winning device 321 is provided so as to prevent or allow the game ball to enter the big winning hole 322. The special electric winning device 321 includes a guide plate 323 provided below the big winning opening 322 so as to penetrate the game board 24 in the front and back direction. The guide plate 323 is provided so as to be movable in the front and rear directions by being driven by a drive means (not shown), and is set to a blocking position where the amount of protrusion from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is minimized, and a corresponding position. It moves between a guiding position, which is a position where the pachinko machine 10 is slid forward from the blocking position, and where the amount of protrusion of the game board 24 from the board surface to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is maximum.

In the game board 24, a ball receiving part 324 is provided above the right end of the guide plate 323, and further above the special electric winning device 321 in the right area PA3, a ball receiving part 324 is provided above the special electric prize winning device 321 in the right area PA3. A guide nail group 241 is provided for guiding all the balls to the ball receiving portion 324 (see FIG. 95). The guide nail group 241 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b so as to be inclined downward to the right. All the game balls flowing into the right side area PA3 are guided to the ball receiving part 324 by the guide nail group 241. The distance between the front end of the ball receiving part 324 and the window panel 52 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 is sloped downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the game balls that have reached the upper surface of the ball receiving portion 324 will flow down toward the front side of the Pachinko machine 10 due to their own weight.

When the guide plate 323 is placed in the blocking position, the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is larger than the diameter of the game ball, as shown in FIG. 96(a). Become. In this blocking position, the front end of the guide plate 323 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the ball receiving part 324. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is placed in the blocking position, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the ball receiving part 324 basically passes through the space between the ball receiving part 324 and the window panel 52 to the lower part of the ball receiving part 324. It will fall. Further, the protrusion dimension of the guide plate 323 disposed at the blocking position from the board surface of the game board 24 forward is less than the radius of the game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball guided by the guide nail group 241 bounces on the ball receiving part 324 and heads toward the guide plate 323 located at the blocking position, it will not land on the guide plate 323 and will be connected to the guide plate 323 and the window. It will fall below the guide plate 323 through the space between it and the panel 52. With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is placed in the blocking position, the occurrence of a winning in the big winning opening 322 is prevented. In addition, as mentioned above, the through gate 35 is provided at a position close to the variable display unit 36, and its position is to the left of the ball receiving part 324 so that it is difficult for the game balls that bounced on the ball receiving part 324 to reach it. They are located at a distance. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is placed at the blocking position, winnings to the through gate 35 are also prevented from occurring.

When the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the distance between the front end of the guide plate 323 and the window panel 52 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Become. In this guiding position, the front end of the guiding plate 323 is located closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 than the front end of the ball receiving part 324. Therefore, when the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position, a game ball that reaches the upper surface of the ball receiving part 324 will reach the upper surface of the area of the guide plate 323 that protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24. It will be posted.

On the upper surface of the protrusion area 325 that protrudes toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 than the board surface of the game board 24 when the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position, two partition walls 326 and 327 are provided at intermediate positions in the lateral direction. is provided. Of these partition walls 326, 327, the first partition wall 326 existing on the right side extends from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position. In this situation, the rear end of the first partition wall 326 and the board surface of the game board 24 are separated by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second partition wall 327 on the left side extends from the board surface of the game board 24 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position. However, the front end of the second partition wall 327 is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 by a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball than the front end of the guide plate 323. In the configuration in which the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 are formed in this manner, the upper surface of the protrusion region 325 is generally inclined downward toward the left. In addition, on the upper surface of the protrusion area 325, the area to the left of the ball receiving part 324 and up to the position of the first partition wall 326 slopes downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and from the position of the first partition wall 326 to the position of the second partition wall 326. It slopes downward toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 up to the position of the partition wall 327, and slopes downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the position of the second partition wall 327 to the position of the grand prize opening 322. In other words, the upper surface of the protruding area 325 is connected to the first partition wall 326 and the game board while the game ball resting on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 flows down to the left when the guiding plate 323 is placed at the guiding position. 24 and the space between the second partition wall 327 and the front end of the guide plate 323, so that it flows downward while meandering in the front-rear direction.

In addition, in the situation where the guiding plate 323 is placed at the guiding position, the distance between the front end of the guiding plate 323 and the window panel 52 is less than the radius of the game ball, so the guiding plate 323 is placed at the guiding position. The window panel 52 prevents the game balls resting on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 from falling from the front end of the guide plate 323 toward the lower side of the guide plate 323 in the situation where the guide plate 325 is placed. Further, the left end of the guide plate 323 faces the center frame 36a of the variable display unit 36 at a close position, and the distance between the left end of the guide plate 323 and the center frame 36a is the radius of the game ball. It is less than Therefore, in a situation where the guide plate 323 is placed at the guide position, it is important that the game ball resting on the upper surface of the protruding area 325 fall from the left end of the guide plate 323 toward the bottom of the guide plate 323. It is blocked by frame 36a.

With the above configuration, when the guide plate 323 is placed at the guiding position, the game ball flows down the projecting area 325 due to its own weight along the meandering path on the projecting area 325, and the game ball wins a big prize. The ball will enter the mouth 322. The game ball that has entered the big winning hole 322 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the big winning hole 322. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63, and the main side CPU 63 identifies whether or not there is a prize in the big winning hole 322 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. In the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a round game or a small winning result in which the big winning hole 322 is to be opened, when it is specified that one game ball has entered the big winning hole 322, the main The value of the prize winning counter in the side RAM 65 is subtracted by 1. When the value of the prize winning counter becomes "0", it is determined that a prize corresponding to the upper limit number of prizes has been won as in the first embodiment, and the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a round game or a small winning result. Terminate it.

In a situation where a game ball is placed on the guide plate 323 placed at the guide position, if a game ball of the upper limit number of winnings enters the big winning hole 322, the guide plate 323 is placed on the guide plate 323 with the game ball placed on it. Move from the guiding position to the blocking position. In this case, the game balls on the guide plate 323 follow the movement of the guide plate 323 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, move toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and hit the surface of the game board 24 from the front. By contacting the guide plate 323 and preventing further backward movement, the guide plate 323 finally loses its support from below and falls downward.

As already explained, the through gate 35 is provided below the special electric prize winning device 321, but the position of the through gate 35 is in the horizontal positional relationship between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323. It is in the same position as the area between. In addition, between the special electric winning device 321 and the through gate 35, the game ball that was placed in the inter-compartment area Y between the first partition wall 326 and the second partition wall 327 of the guide plate 323 is A regulating nail group 242 is provided that guides the falling game ball toward the through gate 35 so that when it falls as it moves from the position to the blocking position, it will win the through gate 35 (see FIG. 95). . As a result, when the guide plate 323 moves from the allowable position to the blocking position in a situation where a game ball is placed on the inter-section area Y, a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. Incidentally, the inter-section area Y is spaced to the left with respect to the ball receiving portion 324 by a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball, more specifically, a dimension larger than three times the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, in a situation where the guiding plate 323 is placed at the blocking position, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving portion 324 is prevented from winning the through gate 35.

A game ball that has won a prize in the through gate 35 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to the through gate 35. This detection sensor is electrically connected to the main CPU 63, and the main CPU 63 determines whether or not there is a prize in the through gate 35 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. When it is determined that one game ball has entered the through gate 35, the general random number counter The numerical information of C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 65c as holding information on the general drawing side.

Here, if the game ball is launched in the shortest firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) by the same firing mode that causes the game ball to flow down the right side area PA3, the guide plate 323 is at the guiding position. The inter-section area Y is arranged so that there is a high possibility that a game ball with the next firing order exists in the inter-section area Y with respect to a game ball that enters the big winning hole 322. The position of is set. As a result, when a game ball is placed on the guide board 323 placed at the guide position and a game ball of the upper limit number of winnings enters the big winning hole 322, the ball that is placed on the guide board 323 is It becomes easier for game balls to enter the through gate 35.

In addition, a meandering passage that not only extends laterally but also meanders in the front-rear direction is formed in the protruding area 325 of the guide plate 323, and in this meandering passage, an inter-section area Y is located at a position upstream of the big prize opening 322. It is set. Thereby, it is possible to set the inter-section region Y that makes it easy to win through the gate 35 while suppressing an increase in the lateral dimension of the guide plate 323.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
- Both the combination of the special electric prize winning device 32 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment and the combination of the special electric prize winning device 321 and the through gate 35 in the nineteenth embodiment are provided, and the execution trigger of the opening/closing execution mode is The configuration may be such that the type of the special electric winning device 32, 321 to which the opening/closing control is executed is changed depending on the type of game result obtained. In this case, it is better for the special electric prize winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment to be the target of opening/closing control than for the special electric prize winning device 32 in the first embodiment to be the target of opening/closing control. Since winnings are more likely to occur, the player expects that the special electric winning device 321 in the nineteenth embodiment will be subject to opening/closing control.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are all configured to store history information (or ball entry history). However, it is not limited to this, and only some of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are subject to storage of history information. It may be configured as follows. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operating opening 34 are subject to storing historical information, or a configuration in which only the general winning opening 31 is subject to storing historical information may be adopted. It's good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball during a predetermined period with respect to the ball entry part for which the history information is stored.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball is transmitted in correspondence with each of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. Although the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118c are set for the purpose of Even in a configuration in which there are a plurality of ball entry detection sensors and a plurality of ball entry detection sensors, the configuration may be such that the information is transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to suppress the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66.

(3) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the correspondence information is stored in advance in the management IC 66. In this case, there is no need to execute a process for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence relationship information, so it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 63.

(4) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Although this is configured to be performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be able to communicate bidirectionally, and the management IC 66 may be able to communicate with the management IC 66. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is configured to be used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped is transferred to the main CPU 63. The configuration is such that even if the supply of operating power is stopped, the information is stored and retained in the correspondence memory 116. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) In the first embodiment, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and each buffer 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the configuration is such that the signal paths 118a to 118g are used to transmit information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence relationship information is mainly used. A configuration may also be adopted in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. This allows the management IC 66 to know which type of information it is receiving from the main CPU 63 based on the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63, but this is not limiting. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on history information are transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment above so that notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters received are performed. , the main CPU 63 sends commands corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the audio light emission control device 81, thereby controlling the contents of the various parameters using the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41. A configuration may also be adopted in which a corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, and The content of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, the symbol display device 41, etc. In this case, when the gaming hall starts business, it is possible to confirm whether or not the entry state of game balls in the gaming area PA on the previous business day was normal.

(8) If the various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the game cannot be started on the pachinko machine 10 until the prohibition release operation is performed. You can also use it as As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the firing of game balls is prohibited, a configuration in which each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 49a is disabled, and a configuration in which the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the win/fail determination process may not be executed. Further, the prohibition release operation may be performed by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erase switch is turned ON, and can be performed when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the outer frame 11. It is also possible to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played in a situation where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner.

(9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculations of various parameters using the history information are performed by either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. It is also possible to have a configuration in which neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameter calculations may be performed using the read history information by the reading worker. Often, the reading device may perform calculations on various parameters using the read history information. In this case, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load on the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main CPU 63 may have the functions of storing history information and calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments, and the payout side The configuration may be included in the CPU 92 or the audio emission control device 81. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 is equipped with these functions, information on the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control entity equipped with the function. That will happen.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a separate power source from the main CPU 63, so even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which information such as history information or various parameters can be output. This allows the reading device to read history information and various parameters even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped.

(12) Although the reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with the reading device, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a terminal used for reading historical information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, the terminals used to read the history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a location other than the MPU 62 on the main control board 61.

(13) The correspondence memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to a configuration in which they are provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. Any of 116, 117, and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main CPU 63 is reduced. The information may be stored and retained even if the supply of the information is stopped. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, or a configuration in which backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main side RAM 65. Good too.

(14) It is not limited to a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using historical information, and historical information is not stored and the game ball is detected by any of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. A configuration may be adopted in which various parameters are calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the frequency of calculation of various parameters becomes high, it becomes possible to extract various parameters at any timing.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU and executes storage processing of history information and calculation processing of various parameters based on programs and data stored in the management ROM 113. , a configuration may be adopted in which a hardware circuit designed to have these functions is formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, regarding the configuration, for example, in the first embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by 1. Furthermore, when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters that are calculation results and also outputs history information to the outside.

(16) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which information on the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as historical information, the occurrence of a transition to the opening/closing execution mode may be stored as historical information. Often, the timing of transition to opening/closing execution mode and the timing of termination may be stored as historical information, or the occurrence of transition to high-frequency support mode may be stored as historical information. It may be configured such that the occurrence of the event is stored as history information. Alternatively, the probability of transitioning to opening/closing execution mode may be calculated by using the above-mentioned history information, or the probability of transitioning to high-frequency support mode may be calculated, and the probability of transitioning to high-frequency support mode may be calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. A configuration may also be adopted in which the history information and various parameters can be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, separate boards, or separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, while the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, It may be configured such that history information including RTC information is stored regarding the entry of a ball into a bonus opportunity ball entry section, such as the second operation port 34, which is a trigger for the payout of prize balls of game balls and the win/fail judgment process. As a result, it is possible to extract the history of the entry of game balls into the bonus-opportunity ball entry section, and to calculate the frequency of entry of game balls into each bonus-opportunity ball entry section with respect to the total number of game balls discharged. Become.

(19) A configuration may be adopted in which items other than those in each of the above embodiments are included as items to be saved as history information. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a is in a full state, the timing at which the full state is started, and the timing at which the full state is canceled is stored as history information. It may be configured such that at least one of the fact that there is no ball state, the timing at which the no ball state is started, and the timing at which the no ball state is canceled is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 is in an abnormal state. In particular, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 started and the timing when the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it becomes possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the first embodiment and the like, it is set in advance at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the management IC 66 recognizes that the 16th buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It may also be a configuration. In this case, there is no need to previously set in the management IC 66 the correspondence between each of the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to those buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entry section that occurs when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is stored as history information, and the number of entering balls is grasped using the history information. The configuration may be such that the information is externally output to the reading device. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry section in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it becomes possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entry section that occurs when the front door frame 14 is in an open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entering is an abnormal number. In such cases, an abnormality notification may be executed. This makes it possible to deal with fraudulent acts in which the front door frame 14 is opened illegally and game balls are entered into a predetermined ball entry section.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to send a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when it is operating normally. In this case, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the first embodiment, etc., the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the checking process for the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reversed from that in the first embodiment, etc. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process of changing the output state of each signal matches the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for each of the buffers 122a to 122o.

(24) When the information stored in the main ROM 64 is output externally using the reading terminal 102, a configuration may be adopted in which one of the program and data can be selectively output externally, and a predetermined program A configuration may also be adopted in which only the data can be output to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. Note that, as a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be output to the outside from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. is possible.

(25) Other information to be output externally through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information or various parameters, and for example, when an abnormality occurs. may be configured to store history information of the abnormality occurrence, and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a Although the configuration is such that the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by summing the number of game balls detected, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is not limited to this, and for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA are determined. A configuration may be adopted in which a passage area through which game balls pass one by one is provided, and a discharge detection sensor is provided to detect game balls passing through the passage area. In this case, by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA. In addition, in this configuration, similarly to each of the above embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls entering each of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry section to the total number of game balls that have been ejected from the game area PA.

(27) In the first embodiment, the through gate 35 is not provided on the downstream side of the special prize winning device 32, but an operating port is provided that triggers the acquisition of reservation information on the special drawing side. Good too. For example, if the electric appliance 34a is defective and the actuating port is not provided with a member that directly prevents or allows the entry of game balls, the actuating port that triggers the acquisition of the second reservation information is provided. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In this case, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode, an opportunity to acquire the second pending information will occur. In addition, in this configuration, if the second pending information is subject to a validity determination, the opening/closing execution mode is surely generated, so that when a game ball enters the operating port in the opening/closing execution mode, The opening/closing execution mode will definitely occur. This increases the importance of the game ball entering the operating port in the opening/closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(28) In the first embodiment, by providing the through gate 35 on the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32, the game ball can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric winning device 32 is opened or closed. However, the configuration for providing a ball entry portion that allows a game ball to enter in the opening/closing execution mode is not limited to this. For example, the special electric opening/closing member of the special electric winning device 32 is configured like the general electric utility accessory 34a of the second operation port 34, and by disposing the special electric opening/closing member from the closed position to the open position, one of the special electric opening/closing members is changed. The player presses the ball entry opening/closing member of a predetermined ball entry part, and the ball entry opening/closing member moves from a closed position to an open position, thereby making it possible for a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry part. Good too. In this case, when the special electric opening/closing member returns from the open position to the closed position, the pressure on the ball entrance opening/closing member by the special electric opening/closing member is released, and the ball entrance opening/closing member returns from the open position to the closed position. . Even with this configuration, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section in the opening/closing execution mode.

(29) Even in a situation where the special electric winning device 32 is not opened or closed, the game ball can reach the position where the game ball can reach and when a firing operation is performed aiming at the special electric winning device 32. A through gate 35 may be provided at the position, and an electric opening/closing member for preventing or allowing game balls to enter the through gate 35 may be provided. When the opening/closing execution mode is started, the electric opening/closing member moves at a constant cycle to a blocking position where the game ball is prevented from entering the through gate 35 and a position where the game ball enters the through gate 35. The structure is such that it moves between the permissible position and the permissible position. Even with this configuration, the game ball can enter the through gate 35 in the opening/closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(30) In the above-described first embodiment, when a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the hold information on the general figure side is acquired, the second operating port 34 is reliably brought into the open state. You can also use it as Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(31) In the first embodiment, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 can enter the through gate 35, The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball placed on the guide plate section 214 can enter the through gate 35 when the special electric prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. In other words, in this configuration, even if the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state, it is not possible to win a prize in the special electric winning device 32, but the game ball can be placed on the guide plate part 214, and the guiding plate part 214 When a special electric winning device 32 is switched from a closed state to an open state in a situation where a game ball is placed on the ball, the game ball can fall toward a through gate 35. In this case, the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will land on the guide plate section 214 when the special electric winning device 32 is in the closed state. It becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(32) When the special electric winning device 32 switches from the closed state to the open state, the game ball placed on the guide plate part 214 can enter the through gate 35, and the special electric winning device 32 changes from the open state to the closed state A configuration may also be adopted in which the game ball placed on the guide plate section 214 can enter the through gate 35 when the switch is made. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the start timing and end timing of the opening round of the special electric winning device 32, respectively. Further, it is possible to generate many opportunities for game balls to enter the through gate 35. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(33) In the first embodiment, when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 is reliably prevented from flowing down to the downstream side of the special electric winning device 32. You can also use it as For example, the opening/closing member 202 has a plate shape without an opening 213, similar to the guide plates 271, 281 in the fifteenth embodiment, and when the opening/closing member 202 is placed in the closed position, the opening/closing member 202 is connected to the game board. The opening/closing member 202 may be recessed behind the board surface of the game board 24 and extend between the board surface of the game board 24 and the window panel 52 when the game board 24 is placed in the open position. As a result, when the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, except for the game balls that are on the opening/closing member 202 at the timing when the special electric winning device 32 switches from the open state to the closed state, it flows down the right side area PA3. The game balls that play will surely win the prize in the special electric prize winning device 32. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(34) In the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the through gate 35 and the normal current is opened, the second operating port 34 is electrically opened. For example, when a game ball enters the through gate 35, the second operating port 34 is opened by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the entered game ball. , a configuration in which when one or two game balls enter the second operating port 34, the second operating port 34 returns to the closed state by mechanically interlocking using the pressing force of the game balls. You can also use it as Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(35) In the first embodiment, the game ball that enters the through gate 35 continues to flow down the gaming area PA, but the invention is not limited to this, and the ball enters the through gate 35. The played game ball may be ejected from the game area PA by being led out to the back side of the game board 24. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(36) The configuration of the special electric winning device 32 of the first embodiment and the configuration of the special electric winning devices 261, 262 of the fifteenth embodiment are applied to the second operating port 34, and the second operating port A predetermined ball entry portion may be provided at a position where the ball can enter only when the ball 34 is opened or closed. In this case, the predetermined ball entry part may be the entry part where the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters, and the reservation information on the special drawing side or the reservation on the general drawing side depending on the entry of the game ball. It may also be a ball entry section from which information is acquired.

(37) In the opening/closing execution mode, the pending information on the ordinary figure side may not be digested. As a result, the transition of the second actuating port 34 to the general power open state in response to the acquisition of the hold information on the general figure side in the opening/closing execution mode occurs after the opening/closing execution mode ends. It becomes possible for the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(38) Even in the opening/closing execution mode, the pending information on the ordinary figure side is digested, but the fluctuating display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display section 38a that is started in the opening/closing execution mode continues until the opening/closing execution mode ends. It may also be a configuration. Even in this case, it is possible for the player to aim for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(39) A configuration may be adopted in which when the second pending information is subject to the validity determination process, it can be a losing result as well as a jackpot result and a small winning result. Further, even if the first pending information is subject to the validity determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which a small winning result can be obtained.

(40) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility object 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared with the situation where the game balls continue to be launched in the same manner into the game area PA, the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity random number counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 for both), but In the frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric utility accessory 34a is in the open state when the general electric power open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is also set to be longer. There is. In this case, when the general power open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., The duration of one display on the display section 38a is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the power grid per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the power grid release lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the general power open state. In addition, the secured time period that is secured between the time when one general electricity lottery is held and the next general electricity distribution lottery is held (for example, the period of time that is secured on the general electricity map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35) is In configurations where multiple types of variable display times are available, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. Good too. In addition, the number of times the power grid is released, the length of time it is open, the amount of time secured between one general power grid release lottery and the next power grid release lottery is shortened, and such secured time. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning.

(41) When the special electric winning device 32 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32, and when the special electric winning device 32 is in the closed state, the game ball can be inserted into the special electric winning device 32. The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which it is not possible to enter a game ball into the special electric winning device 32, and even if the special electric winning device 32 is in a closed state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special electric winning device 32, but it is in an open state. A configuration may be adopted in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter the special electric winning device 32 than in the case of the present invention. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(42) When the second operating port 34 is in an open state, a game ball can enter the second operating port 34, and when the second operating port 34 is in a closed state, the second operating port 34 The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second operating port 34, and even if the second operating port 34 is in a closed state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second operating port 34. A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is less likely to enter the second operating port 34 than if it were in an open state. Note that this configuration may be applied to embodiments other than the first embodiment.

(43) It is not possible for the player to replenish the pachinko machine 10 with game balls, and the game balls circulate within the pachinko machine 10, and information on the number of game balls that can be used by the player is stored and retained. The configurations of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which game balls can be fired within the range of the stored information on the number of usable game balls.

(44) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the audio emission control device 81 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 82 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 82 controls the audio emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Furthermore, the configuration of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 81 and the configuration of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

(45) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, for example, when a game is started based on the operation of a start lever, the results of the lottery processing of the winning combinations executed are recorded as history information. It may also be configured to store it as history information and use that history information to calculate the actual winning probability of each winning combination.When a transition to a special control state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information and the history information is stored as history information. The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special control state is calculated using the information, or the ratio of the number of games staying in the special control state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or the gaming machine itself may make notifications corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters.

(46) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined; The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment may be combined, and the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment and the fifteenth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined. Further, to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination, the configurations of the other embodiments described above may be applied in any combination.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
Specific memory execution means (for executing ball entry detection processing in the main CPU 63), which stores information corresponding to the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the specific storage means (main RAM 65); function) and
A benefit that executes processing for granting a benefit to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. A granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92),
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the tenth embodiment). In the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (the first - Predetermined storage execution means (first - In the ninth, eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the history setting process in the main side CPU 63, step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S3220 and step S3223.

According to feature A1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a benefit is granted to the player. be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of game balls entered into the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of ball entry is stored in the predetermined storage means. Predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for awarding a benefit to a player.

According to feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the mode of entry of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means by not allowing the predetermined information to trigger execution of processing for granting benefits to players. It becomes possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature A3. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, and prevents the game ball from entering the specific ball entering means. Specific information that allows the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and information on the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Feature A4. All ball entry means for ejecting entered game balls from the gaming area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are subject to storage in the predetermined storage means of information corresponding to the occurrence of the entry of game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball entering means.

According to feature A4, all the ball entry means that eject game balls from the gaming area are subject to management using information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the ball entry frequency for any ball entry means can be controlled. can be managed using information stored in a predetermined storage means. Furthermore, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means to the number of game balls ejected from the gaming area using information stored in the predetermined storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A5, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, by using the predetermined information, it is possible to insert the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. It becomes possible to understand the ball entry history in detail.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is counting information on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

According to feature A6, since the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, the manner in which the game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means can be controlled while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. management.

Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means under a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S804 and S809, in the eighth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S3004, and in the ninth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S804 and S809. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the side CPU 112.

According to feature A7, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature A8. Any of features A1 to A7, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature A8, it becomes possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature A9. Equipped with a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output unit outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit.

According to feature A9, it becomes possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. Means (main unit) for specifying which of the information stored in the predetermined storage means and the control program is the information to be output from the information output section, and for outputting information corresponding to the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature A9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63.

According to feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output section for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be outputted to the outside is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is outputted to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature A11. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A11, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific storage execution means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load on the first control means is extremely increased. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing this from occurring.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It is possible to prevent this.

Feature A13. Equipped with specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The predetermined storage executing means causes the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding thereto when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means, thereby preventing the game from being played to the specific ball entering means. Specific information that allows the number of balls entered or the frequency of balls entered by a control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, history information, ninth to ninth embodiments) In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means (first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63). function to output either) and
A second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entering means (the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63 function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball entering means is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of ball entry frequency between the predetermined ball entry means and the specific ball entry means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means. Second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature A14. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to feature A14, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. In addition, since the identifying information that makes it possible to identify whether or not it is a predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the identifying information is transmitted to the first information and the second control means by the second control means. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing this information from other information such as 2 information.

Feature A15. The first control means transmits identification information to the second control means indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, further comprising an identification information transmitting means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature A15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined ball entering means and that the second information corresponds to a specific ball entering means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, there is no need to previously store the correspondence between these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means. Become.

Feature A17. According to feature A15 or A16, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature A18. When receiving the identification information, the second control means is capable of specifying that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball entry means. Any one of features A15 to A17 is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing correspondence relationship information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. This provides the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. There is no need to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function that outputs either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.
Feature A15, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of A18 to A18.

According to feature A19, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. The second control means, as a receiving section capable of receiving information from the first control means, has a receiver that is capable of receiving information from the first control means, and has a receiver that is capable of receiving information from the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, characterized in that a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to feature A20, since the second control means is provided with a number of receiving sections greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Even if the number of types of information increases or decreases accordingly, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration of the receiving section. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. A first external output means (management) for outputting information on a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means to a device external to the gaming machine. (a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
A second external output means (management) for outputting information on a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specific ball entering means to a device external to the gaming machine. (a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to determine how the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and how the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. It becomes possible to specify the manner in which the ball enters the ball. In addition, when the external output is performed, a combination of predetermined information and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the specified ball entry method is output to the outside, as well as specific information and correspondence to the specific ball entry method. Information in combination with information that makes it possible to recognize what is being done is output to the outside. This makes it possible to specify each ball entry mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, third 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112. In the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2702 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2702 in the management CPU 112. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2905 (in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63) .

According to feature A22, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing information in the predetermined storage means (a first - In the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the processing in step S804 and step S809 in the management side CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S3004 in the management side CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S3004 in the management side CPU 112. a function of executing the process of step S3103 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means is a means (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017, and in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S2308, A function to execute the process of step S2313 and step S2317, a function to execute the process of step S2502 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S2702 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, Feature A22 is characterized in that the seventh embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the management side CPU 112, and the function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment. The game machine described.

According to feature A23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not it is a predetermined situation and calculate the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A24. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process in step S1019 in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process in step S2505 in the management CPU 112). Game machine.

According to feature A24, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to cause an event in which the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A25. Feature A22, characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used in calculating the aspect information remains stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in A23.

According to feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read and the game ball entered. When analyzing a mode, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the mode information.

Feature A26. The information calculation means, when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, characterized in that the mode information is calculated.

According to feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated on a unit of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature A27. Features A22 to 32 are characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation trigger occurs that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to feature A27, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27.

According to feature A28, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in a situation where a game is being executed.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized in that the game machine includes an external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A29, by outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the aspect information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information can be output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature A31. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature A29 or The gaming machine described in A30.

According to feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (steps S2310, S2314, and S2318 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature A32, it becomes possible to accumulate aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of types of information at once when managing the game ball entering manner.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means includes:
A means for determining whether the aspect information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2503 in the management CPU 112);
means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2504 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

According to feature A33, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature A34, information that makes it possible to specify when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature A35. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features A22 to A34, the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on the instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S3505, step S3507, and step S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35.

According to feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for the game hall manager and the like to grasp the management result of the game ball entering manner without having to read the manner information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature A38. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation are provided. It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, characterized in that the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature A39, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is notified. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. Features A1 to 6 are characterized in that they include means (a function for executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63) for externally outputting corresponding information when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means; The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to feature A40, in a configuration where when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information is outputted to the outside, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, by using the corresponding information, you can easily grasp the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means and the frequency of entry, and by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of ball entry.

Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature A41, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A41, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) is stored in the predetermined information. Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, the main side CPU 63) (a function to execute the processes of step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220, and step S3223);
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments In the third embodiment, the function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112. In the fifth embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the process in step S2502, in the fifth embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the process in step S2702, and in the seventh embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the process in step S2905. function, in the eleventh embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the gaming machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to perform processing corresponding to the results of a game in a predetermined period on the gaming machine itself, or it is possible to externally output mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is a means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments) In the eighth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S804 and S809, and in the ninth embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing step S3103. functions),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation and calculates the aspect information (first, second, sixth, eighth, In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017, and in the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S2308, S2313, and S2317. In the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2502 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2702 in the management CPU 112, in the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2502 in the management CPU 112. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment.

According to feature B2, it is possible to distinguish whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not, and calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period.

Feature B3. When the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, means for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) According to the feature B1 or B2, the fourth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112, and a function of executing the process of step S2505 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. Game machine.

According to feature B3, when the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult to cause an event in which the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B4. Feature B1 characterized in that even if the aspect information is calculated by the information calculation means, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is maintained stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in B2.

According to feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in a predetermined period. When analyzing the results of , it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to the predetermined information on which the aspect information was calculated.

Feature B5. Feature B1 characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of B4 to B4.

According to feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started, the mode information is calculated on a unit of each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

Feature B6. Any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation trigger that can repeatedly occur occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature B6, since the mode information is calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (a measurement counter provided in the main side RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period;
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where a game is not being executed, and when a game is started in a situation where the period measurement is stopped, restarts the measurement of the period from the state before stopping. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to feature B7, since the configuration is such that the aspect information is calculated every time a predetermined period of time passes, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information by simply adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not being played, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. This makes it possible to exclude a situation where a game is not being played from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it becomes possible to appropriately derive the aspect information in a situation where a game is being executed.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized in that the game machine is equipped with an external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means to a device external to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature B8, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device external to the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device external to the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device external to the gaming machine, so that when reading the mode information and analyzing the ball landing mode of the game ball, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information can be output. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for calculating the aspect information.

Feature B10. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
Equipped with
Feature B8 or The gaming machine described in B9.

According to feature B10, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (steps S2310, S2314, and S2318 in the management CPU 112 in the third embodiment) that sequentially stores the aspect information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2504 in the management CPU 112).

According to feature B11, it becomes possible to accumulate aspect information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of form information at once when managing the form of game results in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the form information in the calculation result storage means when the form information is storage target information (a function for executing the process of step S2504 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature B11.

According to feature B12, when the aspect information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the aspect information is stored in the calculation result storage means. This makes it possible to limit the aspect information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it becomes possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify the time when the aspect information was calculated, in association with the aspect information. Machine.

According to feature B13, information that makes it possible to specify the time when the mode information was calculated is attached to the mode information. This makes it possible to analyze each aspect information while grasping when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature B14. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
Equipped with
According to any one of features B1 to B13, the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when the second control means receives calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. gaming machines.

According to feature B14, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is changed based on an instruction from the first control means. It becomes possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. comprising a notification control means (a function for executing the processes of step S3505, step S3507, and step S3508 in the main CPU 63) that controls the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) to notify the content corresponding to the mode information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14.

According to feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. This makes it possible for a game hall manager or the like to grasp the gaming management results for a predetermined period without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means.

Feature B17. a first control means (main CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating aspect information and the result of the calculation are provided. It becomes possible to consolidate the functions for executing the notification corresponding to the above in the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means so that a first notification is executed when the aspect information is information in a first range, and when the aspect information is information in a second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, characterized in that the notifying means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to feature B18, the aspect information is not reported as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the aspect information is included is reported. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it becomes possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34);
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the entry is stored in a predetermined storage means (the history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the history memory 117 in the tenth embodiment). (in the main side RAM 65), predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) Predetermined storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment) A function of executing the processes of step S3202, step S3205, step S3208, step S3212, step S3216, step S3220 and step S3223 in the main CPU 63),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, third 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing steps S2308, S2313, and S2317 in the management CPU 112. In the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S2502 in the management CPU 112, in the fifth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2702 in the management CPU 112, and in the seventh embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S2702 in the management CPU 112. a function of executing the process of step S2905, a function of executing the process of step S3503 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, storage processing of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball, and by using this managed information, it is possible to It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entry means. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible, for example, to perform processing corresponding to the manner in which the game ball enters the game machine itself, or to externally output manner information that is the result of calculations using predetermined information. .

Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature B20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B20, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. a program output means (a function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102);
an information output unit (a function of executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) that outputs special information using the information output unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, it becomes possible to output special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature C2. Selection means (step S902 in the main CPU 63) that specifies which of the special information and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, and outputs information corresponding to the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of (a).

According to feature C2, in a configuration in which special information is externally output using an information output unit for externally outputting a control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. The player is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only the necessary information even in a configuration where the information output section is also used.

Feature C3. The selection means determines which of the special information and the control program is the information to be output from the information output unit, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that:

According to feature C3, which information is to be output from the information output section is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature C4. Any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that a chip (MPU 62) having a program storage means (main side ROM 64) that stores the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature C4, it is possible to consolidate signal paths for the information output section within the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making it difficult to make unauthorized access to the signal path for the information output unit.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C4, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Comprising a first control means (main CPU 63) and a second control means (management CPU 112),
The first control means includes:
A benefit granting means (a function of executing the process of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, a function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92) for granting a benefit to the player when a predetermined event occurs;
Information transmitting means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the predetermined event occurs;
Equipped with
The second control means stores information corresponding to the predetermined event information when it receives the predetermined event information. In the embodiment, the predetermined information (1st to 8th , historical information in the twelfth embodiment, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means (first to ninth , in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the history setting process in the main side CPU 63. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S3223).

According to feature D1, a bonus is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the predetermined event to occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine. The predetermined information will be stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, the manner in which predetermined events occur can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, by storing the predetermined information in the gaming machine itself, it becomes possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load on the first control means is prevented from increasing excessively. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature D2, by providing the first control means and the second control means on the same chip, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means. It is possible to prevent this.

Feature D3. The predetermined storage execution means stores the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event in the gaming machine or external to the gaming machine by executing storage processing of information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined storage unit when the specific event occurs. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to 11th embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. so that
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means for transmitting first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
a second transmitting means (a function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when the specific event occurs; )and,
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which a predetermined event occurs, but also the manner in which a specific event occurs. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is also possible to manage the ratio of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. transmitted to the second control means. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Feature D4. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present, to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to feature D4, it is possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. In addition, since the identifying information that makes it possible to identify whether or not it is a predetermined situation is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the identifying information is transmitted to the first information and the second control means by the second control means. It becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing this information from other information such as 2 information.

Feature D5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, further comprising a transmitting means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

According to feature D5, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to a predetermined event and that the second information corresponds to a specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means; There is no need to previously store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature D6, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, so that the predetermined event and the specific event may occur. Under certain circumstances, it becomes possible for the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means.

Feature D7. According to feature D5 or D6, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature D7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature D8. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means provides correspondence relationship information that enables it to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. According to any one of features D5 to D7, the apparatus further comprises a means (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) for storing in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). Game machine.

According to feature D8, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event is stored in the second control means. This provides the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. There is no need to do so. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature D9. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function that outputs either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.
Feature D5, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of D8 to D8.

According to feature D9, it is possible to manage the manner in which a predetermined event occurs and the manner in which a specific event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature D10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D10, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, and the above feature D group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A first control means (main CPU 63);
a second control means (management CPU 112) that receives information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
A first transmitting means that transmits first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a first event occurs (a function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
A second transmitting means that transmits second information to the second control means using a second signal path when a second event occurs (a function of outputting any of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )and,
Identification information transmitting means (main side a function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. Thereby, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and it becomes possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing each type of information by the second control means.

Furthermore, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and that the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information There is no need to store the correspondence relationship in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature E2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to enable the second control means to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means. Become.

Feature E3. According to feature E1 or E2, the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Game machine.

According to feature E3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature E4. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of features E1 to E3 is characterized in that it includes means for storing relational information in a correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (a function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management CPU 112). The game machine described.

According to feature E4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entering means is stored in the second control means. This makes it necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to identify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first control means transmits the first information or the second information. disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of first information and second information.

Feature E5. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63, Equipped with a function that outputs either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.
Feature E1, characterized in that the second control means is capable of recognizing the third information as information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present, even without receiving the identification information. The gaming machine according to any one of E4.

According to feature E5, it is possible to manage the manner in which the first event occurs and the manner in which the second event occurs by distinguishing whether the situation is a predetermined situation or not. Further, the fact that the third information is information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be identified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information form of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature E6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, a number of signal paths greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that a signal path is provided.

According to feature E6, the number of signal paths that is greater than the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is provided, so that the information can be transmitted depending on the model of the gaming machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, this can be handled without changing the configuration regarding the signal path. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature E7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in a configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to have a suitable configuration regarding communication, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group F>
Feature F1. A first state is provided in a game area (game area PA) where a game ball flows down, and a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy for a game ball to enter, and a first state in which a game ball cannot enter or it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Variable ball entry means (in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric winning device 261 and the second Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means (executes special electric opening setting processing and special electric closing setting processing in the main side CPU 63 function) and
A transition means (a function of executing special figure confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) for transitioning the gaming state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
In a predetermined game state other than the special control state, entry of a game ball is restricted, and in the special control state, entry of a game ball is allowed. In the embodiment, a through gate 35, in the fourteenth embodiment, a first special ball entrance 251 and a second special ball entrance 252, and in the fifteenth embodiment, a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, the transition of the gaming state to the special control state not only makes it possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but also makes it easier to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means. It is possible to enter the ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the benefit of shifting the gaming state to the special control state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to allow a game ball to enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the special control state.

According to feature F2, even if the gaming state shifts to the special control state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition will be met in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. becomes.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is satisfied based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means.

According to feature F3, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state can occur again. . This makes it possible to create a situation in which special control states occur continuously, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature F4. The transition means is a means for generating the special control state regardless of the entry of a game ball into the special ball entry means (the result of executing the propriety determination process in step S1405 on the first reservation information in the main CPU 63). The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of shifting to an opening/closing execution mode.

According to feature F4, the special control state can occur even if no game ball enters the special ball entry means. With the configuration of feature F3 above, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state is activated. It could happen again. In this case, the player will expect that the special control state will be started in a situation where the special control state is not a special control state, and the player will expect that the special control state will be executed continuously in the special control state. .

Feature F5. It is provided with a predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the entry of a game ball in at least the predetermined gaming state;
At least one of the steps necessary for generating the special control state based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means even if the game ball has not entered the special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized in that a condition is satisfied.

According to feature F5, in a predetermined game state that is not a special control state, a special control state can occur based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. With the configuration of feature F3 above, when the special control state occurs, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, the special control state is activated. It could happen again. In this case, in a predetermined game state that is not a special control state, the player expects the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and in the special control state, not only the variable ball entry means but also the special ball entry means are used. The player expects the game ball to enter the means.

Feature F6. The probability that the special control state will occur based on a game ball entering the special ball entry means is greater than the probability that the special control state will occur based on a game ball entering the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that the game machine is higher in character.

According to feature F6, the probability that a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and a special control state occurs in a predetermined game state that is not a special control state is greater than the probability that a game ball enters the special ball entry means in the special control state. The probability that the special control state will occur continuously after the ball enters the ball is higher. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the game ball will enter the special ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature F7. Means for acquiring special opportunity information when a game ball enters the special ball entry means (in the first to fifteenth embodiments, a function of executing the process of step S1101 in the main CPU 63, in the eighteenth embodiment a function of executing the process of step S4404 in the main CPU 63,
When the special trigger information is acquired, at least one condition necessary for generating the special control state is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein an expected value at which the special control state occurs after the special opportunity information is acquired does not vary depending on the gaming state.

According to feature F7, the expected value at which the special control state occurs after the special opportunity information is acquired does not vary depending on the gaming state, so that the expected value is varied depending on the gaming state. The processing configuration can be simplified compared to the above, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not vary depending on the gaming state, it becomes difficult to add modulation to the game. On the other hand, since it has the configuration of feature F1 described above and is configured to allow the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, it is possible to give a modulation to the opportunity to acquire the special opportunity information. As a result, it becomes possible to add variety to the game.

Feature F8. A triggered ball entry means (second operating port 34) is provided that enables entry of a game ball based on the entry of a game ball into the special ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the trigger for transition to the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means.

According to feature F8, when the game ball enters the special ball entry means, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means, and when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, the special control state is established. There will be an opportunity to transition to As a result, in order to continuously generate the special control state, it becomes necessary to cause the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, and then to cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. Become. Therefore, the uncertainty regarding the continuous occurrence of the special control state increases, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F9. Feature F8 is characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the opportunity ball entry means are provided in a region where the game ball flows down when a firing operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The game machine described.

According to feature F9, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the game ball enters the triggered ball entry means. It becomes possible to aim for the ball to enter the ball.

Feature F10. Means (main CPU 63 ),
According to feature F8 or F9, the frequency with which the opportunity ball entry means becomes in the state where the ball can enter when a game ball enters the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the gaming state. gaming machines.

According to feature F10, the frequency at which the opportunity ball entering means becomes ready for ball entry when a game ball enters the special ball entering means is constant regardless of the gaming state, so that the special ball entering means does not allow game players to The expected value at which a special control state occurs after a ball enters the ball does not vary depending on the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the expected value is varied according to the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not vary depending on the gaming state, it becomes difficult to add modulation to the game. On the other hand, since it has the configuration of the feature F1 described above and is configured to allow the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, there is no chance that the game ball enters the special ball entry means. It becomes possible to give intonation, and as a result, it becomes possible to give intonation to the game.

Feature F11. The special control states include a first special control state (for example, 2R high accuracy result) and a second special control state (for example, 16R high accuracy result),
The game according to any one of features F1 to F10, characterized in that the ease with which a game ball enters the special ball entry means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state. Machine.

According to feature F11, since the ease with which the game ball enters the special ball entry means is different between the first special control state and the second special control state, the ease with which the game ball enters the special ball entry means is reduced. A player who expects this will expect the occurrence of a special control state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature F12. The game ball is configured to be able to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the number of times the special control is executed is different between the first special control state and the second special control state.

According to feature F12, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

In this case, the number of times the variable entry means changes the state is different between the first special control state and the second special control state. As a result, the ease with which the game ball enters the special ball entry means differs between the first special control state and the second special control state, and it is expected that the game ball will enter the special ball entry means. The player expects the occurrence of a special control state in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F13. The game ball is configured to be able to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The gaming machine is
In the special control state, a means for executing a round game in which the special control is executed a predetermined number of times (a function of executing a special electric line start process, a special electric line open process, and a special electric line closed process in the main CPU 63);
When the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means in one round game reaches a predetermined number, means for ending the round game (a function that makes an affirmative determination in step S3703 in the main CPU 63);
a plurality of execution means for causing the special control to be executed a plurality of times in a predetermined round game (a function of executing the process of step S3707 when the round counter in the main CPU 63 is 1);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F13, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means, It is possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of switching between states. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

In this case, in a predetermined round game, the above-mentioned state switching in the variable ball entry means occurs multiple times. Thereby, it becomes possible to generate a predetermined round game in which the game ball is likely to enter the special ball entry means as a round game. Therefore, the player expects the occurrence of a predetermined round game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F14. As the execution mode of the special control, at least a high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set in which the expectation level of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively high or low,
The plurality of execution means is characterized in that the special control that causes the high expectation mode is executed after the special control that causes the low expectation mode is executed in the predetermined round game. The gaming machine described in feature F13.

According to feature F14, in a predetermined round game, the special control that becomes a low expectation mode is executed and then the special control that becomes a high expectation mode is executed, so that the state of the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game It becomes possible to allow a plurality of game balls to enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that switching occurs a plurality of times.

Feature F15. Feature F14 is characterized in that the high expectation mode is such that the upper limit period during which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the predetermined number of balls. The game machine described.

According to feature F15, a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined round game while ensuring that the state switching in the variable ball entry means occurs multiple times in the predetermined round game. It becomes possible to obtain it.

Feature F16. A feature characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F15.

According to feature F16, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the state switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state.

Feature F17. The special ball entry means is on the downstream side of the variable ball entry means in the flowing direction of the game ball in the gaming area, and the variable ball entry means changes from one of the first state and the second state to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F16, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position that allows the inflow of game balls at the timing of switching to.

According to feature F17, the special ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball can enter at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state, When the variable ball entry means is switched from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the switching timing of this state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to in the special control state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special control state. In addition, simply by setting the positional relationship of the special ball entry means with respect to the variable ball entry means as described above, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature F18. The variable ball entry means is configured to be in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, and a game ball that has flowed down from an upstream side of the variable ball entry means is placed on the variable ball entry means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in this state, and the variable ball entering means is in the second corresponding state in the other of the first state and the second state, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction. It has a displacement part (guiding plate part 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entry means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is placed on the displacement part and the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second compatible state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F17, wherein the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming balls can flow in.

According to feature F18, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball that was placed on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. As a result, in the special control state, the player not only determines whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but also determines whether the displacement part is in the first position when the game ball is placed on the displacement part. Attention should be paid to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F19. The gaming machine according to feature F18, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means.

According to feature F19, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

Feature F20. The displacement part is formed such that the game ball resting on the displacement part in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement part,
The special ball entry means is configured to control the special ball entry means when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section. The gaming machine according to feature F18 or F19, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming balls can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

According to feature F20, in order for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary not only for the game ball to be placed on the displacement part that is in the first corresponding state, but also for the game ball on which it is placed to occur. The displacement part needs to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball is within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement section and the switching timing of the state of the displacement section, making it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F21. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the downstream direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature F20, wherein the predetermined range is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to feature F21, the predetermined range, which is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part, is larger than the specific range on the displacement part where the game ball first reaches. It exists on the forward side in the downward direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement part must change from the first response state to the second response state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement part. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement part, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F22. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to feature F21, wherein the ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

According to feature F22, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

In this case, the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means is located further in the downstream direction of the game ball on the displacement part than the predetermined range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part. Existing. As a result, the game ball that is placed on the displacement part but does not reach the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage when the game ball placed on the displacement part does not enter the variable ball entry means is, on the contrary, changed from the player's sense of benefit when the ball enters the special ball entry means. It becomes possible to change.

Feature F23. The predetermined range is the range in which, when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, the next game ball in the firing order exists at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature F22, wherein the gaming machine is set to .

According to feature F23, there is a possibility that a game ball exists within a predetermined range of the displacement part at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means and the displacement part switches to the second corresponding state. becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the special ball entering means.

Feature F24. A first special ball entrance means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entrance means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided as the special ball entrance means,
The gaming machine includes means for giving a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When a first condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the first special ball entry means,
The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F23, characterized in that when a second condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

According to feature F24, depending on whether the condition that is satisfied in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition, the special ball entering means that is the ball entering target is the first special ball entering means or the second special ball entering means. There will be a difference between Then, the profits given are different depending on when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. As a result, the player not only expects that either the first condition or the second condition will be satisfied in the special control state, but also allows the player to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means with higher profit. It is hoped that the conditions will hold true. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature F25. The variable ball entry means is configured to be in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, and a game ball that has flowed down from an upstream side of the variable ball entry means is placed on the variable ball entry means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in a state of It has a displacement part (guiding plate part 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement part is formed so that the game ball resting on the displacement part in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement part,
The first special ball entry means changes the displacement part from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) that is a part of the displacement part. 2 is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the compatible state,
The second special ball entry means changes the displacement part from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) that is a part of the displacement part. The gaming machine according to feature F24, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the gaming ball is switched to the compatible state.

According to feature F25, when a game ball is placed on the displacement part that is in the first corresponding state, the displacement occurs in a situation where the ball is within a range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball resting on the displacement part.

Feature F26. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means,
It is more advantageous for the player for the game ball to enter the first special ball entry means than for the game ball to enter the second special ball entry means,
A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the downstream direction of the game ball,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature F25, wherein the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to feature F26, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is the range in which the ball can enter the first special ball entry means in the displacement part, is the range in which the ball can enter the second special ball entry means, in the displacement part. 2. The ball entry section of the variable ball entry means is located further forward in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part than the first predetermined range, and It exists on the side. It is more advantageous for the player if the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. In this case, a game ball existing on the displacement part near the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means will more easily enter the first special ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player, so the variable ball entry means It is possible to make the profit for the player higher in a situation where the sense of disadvantage that the game ball unfortunately does not enter the ball entry area becomes stronger.

Feature F27. According to any one of features F1 to F26, the game ball is configured to allow a game ball to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is in the first state. gaming machines.

According to feature F27, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means, so when the variable ball entry means is in the first state In this case, the player expects both the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means and the game ball to enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the first state.

Feature F28. The variable ball entry means is
A ball entry section into which game balls can enter (first grand prize opening 265, second grand prize opening 266),
A guiding state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed and the game ball on which it is placed can be guided to the ball entry part, and a guiding state in which the game ball flowing down from the upstream side is guiding means (a first guiding plate 271, a second guiding plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to a non-guiding state in which the ball is not guided to the entered ball portion;
Equipped with
When the guiding means enters the guiding state, the variable ball entry means enters the first state, and when the guiding means enters the non-guiding state, the variable ball entry means enters the second state,
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special entering ball is placed at a position where a game ball that is placed on the guiding means and has flown down to a different area from the ball entering section can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F27, characterized in that a means is provided.

According to feature F28, when the variable ball entry means is in the first state due to the guiding means being in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means is placed in either the variable ball entry means or the special ball entry means. Crab-induced. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball placed on the guide means, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F29. On the upstream side of the guiding means in the downstream direction of the game ball, there are means (a first guide nail group 267, a second guide nail group) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward the guidance start range of the guiding means. group 268),
The guiding means is formed such that in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means flows down in a predetermined guiding direction along the guiding means,
The gaming machine according to feature F28, wherein the ball entry portion and the separate area are located on the side of the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

According to feature F29, both the ball entry part and the separate area exist on the further side in the downstream direction of the game ball in the guiding means than the guidance start range where the game ball first reaches in the guiding means. There is. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the way the game ball flows down the guide means.

Feature F30. The gaming machine according to feature F29, characterized in that the separate area exists on the side of the predetermined guidance direction rather than the ball entry portion.

According to feature F30, a game ball that is placed on the guiding means in the guided state but passes through without entering the ball entry section enters the special ball entry means. As a result, the player feels a sense of disadvantage when the game ball that is on the guiding means does not enter the variable ball entry means, and, conversely, a feeling of benefit when the ball enters the special ball entry means. It becomes possible to change.

Feature F31. As the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means (first special electric winning device 261) and a second variable ball entrance means (second special electric winning device 262) are provided,
As the special ball entry means, a first special ball entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entry means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first variable ball entry means, is in the guiding state, the game ball resting on the first guiding means and the first The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flown down to a first separate region different from the first ball entry portion which is the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means can enter the ball,
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second variable ball entry means, is in the guiding state, a game ball that is placed on the second guiding means and the second The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flown down to a second separate area different from the second ball entry part which is the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features F28 to F30.

According to feature F31, there is a combination of the first variable ball entry means and the first special ball entry means, and a combination of the second variable ball entry means and the second special ball entry means. As a result, by varying the types of combinations that are subject to execution of special control in the special control state, it is possible to vary the percentage of game balls entering each of the variable ball entry means and the special ball entry means. .

Feature F32. The probability that a game ball placed on the first guiding means in the guiding state enters the first special ball entering means, and the probability that the game ball riding on the second guiding means in the guiding state enters the first special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature F31, wherein the probability of a ball entering the second special ball entry means is different.

According to feature F32, by differentiating the types of combinations that are subject to execution of special control in the special control state, it is possible to vary the probability of the game ball entering the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the target of execution of the special control.

Feature F33. The special control state includes a first special control state (for example, 2R low certainty result) and a second special control state (for example, 2R high certainty result),
In the first special control state and the second special control state, the type of the variable ball entry means to which the special control is executed or the selection mode of the variable ball entry means to which the special control is executed is determined. The gaming machine according to feature F32, which is different.

According to feature F33, it is possible to vary the probability of a game ball entering the special ball entry means depending on the type of special control state. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the type of special control state.

Feature F34. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F33, wherein the second special ball entry means is provided on the downstream side of the first special ball entry means in the direction of flow of the game ball.

According to feature F34, since the second special ball entry means is provided on the downstream side of the first special ball entry means in the flowing direction of the game ball, the first variable ball entry means is subject to special control. In this case, the game ball can not only enter the first special ball entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means. Therefore, the player expects that the first variable ball entry means will be subject to special control.

Feature F35. The same benefit is provided regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry means or a game ball enters the second special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F31 to F34.

According to feature F35, the same benefit is granted regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry means or a game ball enters the second special ball entry means, Regardless of whether the special control is executed on either the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player.

Feature F36. The number of game balls available to the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the number of game balls available to the player is increased based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F35, further comprising a means for increasing the number of game balls (a function of executing the processing of step S3902 and step S3904 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature F36, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and also when a game ball enters the special ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases. The number of game balls that can be used increases. By having the configuration of feature F1 above, not only is it possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means by shifting the gaming state to the special control state, but also It becomes possible to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player in the special control state, and it becomes possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

Feature F37. acquisition compatible ball entry means (sudden gate 311) that allows entry of game balls at least in the predetermined gaming state;
information acquisition means (main side CPU 63 (a function of executing the process of acquiring reservation information on the general map side shown in FIG. 92);
trigger ball entry means (second operating port 34) that enters a ball entry-enabled state in which a game ball can enter based on the acquisition of the special opportunity information;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F36, wherein the trigger for transition to the special control state occurs based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means.

According to feature F37, even in a predetermined gaming state that is not a special control state, special opportunity information is acquired when a game ball enters the acquisition-compatible entrance means, and when the special opportunity information is acquired, entry occurs. Trigger of transition to the special control state occurs based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. As a result, not only in the special control state but also in a predetermined game state, the opportunity ball entry means becomes the ball entry enabled state upon acquisition of the special opportunity information, and the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means. It becomes possible to create a situation in which a special control state occurs based on the following.

Feature F38. comprising a regulating means (restriction nail 312) that makes the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means lower than the probability that a game ball enters the special ball entry means in the special control state. The gaming machine according to feature F37.

According to feature F38, it is possible to suppress the probability that a transition to the special control state will occur based on the entry of a game ball into the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of a game ball into the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature F39. It is provided with a predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the entry of a game ball in at least the predetermined gaming state;
The trigger for transition to the special control state occurs without the special trigger information being acquired based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means,
As described in feature F38, the regulating means is configured to make the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means to be lower than the probability of a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. gaming machines.

According to feature F39, the acquisition-compatible ball entry means is more effective than the predetermined ball entry means in which entry of a game ball is possible in a predetermined gaming state and the occurrence of the entry of the game ball triggers a shift to the special control state. In this case, the probability of the game ball hitting the ball is lower. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of a game ball into the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature F40. Acquisition response notification is executed in a situation where the opportunity ball entry means enters the ball entry enabled state based on the special opportunity information being acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F37 to F39, further comprising a notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S4413 in the main CPU 63, and a display control device 82).

According to feature F40, when a game ball enters the acquisition compatible ball entry means and the special opportunity information is acquired, the acquisition response notification is executed to notify that the opportunity ball entry means becomes ready for ball entry. It becomes possible to notify players through As a result, even though the game ball enters the acquisition compatible ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means becomes ready for ball entry, the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means without realizing it. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a phenomenon in which the opportunity to enter the ball disappears.

Feature F41. The notification execution means executes the acquisition response notification on the condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition compatible entry means in a situation where the special control state is not present. The gaming machine according to feature F40, characterized in that:

In the special control state, it is possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, so it is likely that the player is conscious of the opportunity ball entry means being in the state where the ball can enter the ball, but the special control state In a predetermined game state that is not a state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means, so there is a possibility that the player is not conscious of the fact that the opportunity ball entry means is in the state where it is possible to enter the ball. In this case, according to feature F41, when the special trigger information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entering means in a situation other than the special control state, the acquisition response notification is executed. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the fact that the ball entering means is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball. In addition, by preventing acquisition response notification from being executed in a special control state in which there is a high possibility that the player's attention is focused on the opportunity ball entry device becoming ready for ball entry, execution of acquisition response notification is prevented. It is possible to prevent this from becoming a nuisance for the players.

Feature F42. The notification executing means is configured to issue the acquisition response notification on the condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a situation where the special opportunity information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to feature F40 or F41, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be executed.

According to feature F42, it is possible to execute the acquisition response notification in a situation where the player is less conscious of the fact that the opportunity ball entry means is in the state where the ball entry is possible.

Feature F43. Feature F37, characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition compatible ball entry means are provided in a region where the game ball flows down when a firing operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of F42.

According to feature F43, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the game ball enters the acquisition compatible ball entry means. It becomes possible to aim for the game ball to enter the ball.

Feature F44. The opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball is easier to reach the opportunity ball entry means when the launch operation is performed in a specific manner than when the launch operation is performed in the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to feature F43, characterized in that:

According to feature F44, when the ball entry means becomes ready for ball entry in a situation that is not in a special control state, the game ball can enter the ball entry means by performing a firing operation in a specific manner. It becomes possible to make it easier for balls to occur.

Feature F45. trigger ball entry means (second operating port 34) that enables entry of the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the special ball entry means;
A grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) that performs a grant determination based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entering means;
Based on the result of the award determination being the first award corresponding result, the game state is shifted to the special control state, and the gaming state after the end of the special control state is different from the gaming state before the start of the special control state. Means capable of setting different gaming states (a function of executing the processing of step S1904 and step S1905 in the main CPU 63),
Based on the result of the award determination being the second award corresponding result, the game state is shifted to a predetermined gaming state in which the special control by the special control means is executed, and the gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state is A means for maintaining the gaming state before the predetermined gaming state is executed (a function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F44, wherein the probability that the result of the award determination is the second award corresponding result is higher than the probability that the result is the first award corresponding result.

According to feature F45, when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, not only can the result correspond to the first award, but also the result corresponds to the second award, and the probability of the result corresponding to the second award is higher. This is higher than the probability of obtaining the first grant corresponding result. Thereby, by causing the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the variable ball entry means to be in the first state. In this case, by having the configuration of feature F1 described above and having a configuration that allows the game ball to enter the special ball entry means in the special control state, the variable ball entry means It is possible to create a situation in which there are many opportunities for the state to become the first state.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F45, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A first state is provided in a game area (game area PA) where a game ball flows down, and a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy for a game ball to enter, and a first state in which a game ball cannot enter or it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Variable ball entry means (in the first to 13th and 18th embodiments, the special electric prize winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric winning device 261 and the second state) Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means (executes special electric opening setting processing and special electric closing setting processing in the main side CPU 63 function) and
Special ball entry means (through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first through gate 263 and second through gate in the fifteenth embodiment) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter. gate 264) and
trigger ball entry means (second operating port 34) that enters a state in which a game ball can enter based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means;
A grant determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1405 in the main CPU 63) that performs a grant determination based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entering means;
Based on the result of the award determination being the first award response result, the special control state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result) is entered in which the special control is executed, and the special means (a function of executing the processing of step S1904 and step S1905 in the main CPU 63) capable of making the gaming state after the end of the control state different from the gaming state before the start of the special control state;
A predetermined gaming state in which the special control by the special control means is executed based on the result of the award determination being a second award response result (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result) means (a function of making a negative determination in step S1902 in the main CPU 63) for maintaining the gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state at the gaming state before the predetermined gaming state was executed;
Equipped with
In the provision determination, the probability that the second grant correspondence result is obtained is higher than the probability that the first grant correspondence result is obtained,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to enter the special ball entry means under predetermined circumstances.

According to feature G1, when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, not only can the result correspond to the first award, but also the result corresponds to the second award, and the probability of the result corresponding to the second award is higher. This is higher than the probability of obtaining the first grant corresponding result. Thereby, by causing the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, it is possible to generate an opportunity for the variable ball entry means to be in the first state. In this case, it becomes possible in a predetermined situation for the ball to enter the special ball entry means that causes the opportunity ball entry means to enter the ball entry enabled state. As a result, the player who expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means expects the predetermined situation to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The game according to feature G1, characterized in that the frequency with which the opportunity ball entry means becomes in the state where the ball can enter when a game ball enters the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the game state. Machine.

According to feature G2, the frequency at which the triggered ball entry means becomes ready for ball entry when a game ball enters the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the gaming state, and therefore The expected value at which a state in which special control is executed after a ball enters the ball does not vary depending on the game state. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified compared to a configuration in which the expected value is varied according to the gaming state, and the expected value can be easily managed. However, in such a configuration in which the expected value does not vary depending on the gaming state, it becomes difficult to add modulation to the game. On the other hand, since it has the configuration of feature G1 described above and is configured to allow a game ball to enter the special ball entry means in a predetermined situation, it is difficult to adjust the intonation when a game ball enters the special ball entry means. As a result, it becomes possible to give the game more variety.

Feature G3. A predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
The award determination means executes the award determination based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means, and executes the award determination based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. death,
A high probability state and a low probability state are set as states in which the grant determination of the grant determination means is performed such that the probability of the first grant corresponding result in the grant determination is relatively high or low;
The gaming machine controls the game repetition execution means so that the game repetition operation is started based on the above-mentioned award determination being made, and the game repetition operation is ended when the operation continuation period has elapsed. time control means (a function of executing special symbol fluctuation start processing, special symbol fluctuation processing, and special symbol confirmation processing in the main CPU 63),
a period determining means for determining the operation continuation period (a function for executing the process of step S1414 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The period determining means is configured to perform the game repetition operation triggered by the award determination executed based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means in the low probability state, and the result of the award determination is the The average period of the operation continuation period of the game repetition operation in the case where the first award corresponding result is not obtained is the award judgment executed based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the low probability state. be the same as, approximately the same as, or less than the average duration of the operation duration of the game recycle operation in the case where the result of the award determination is not the first award corresponding result in the game recycle operation that is the trigger; It is configured to
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation different from a situation in which the award determination is made in the low probability state.

According to feature G3, it is a game repetition operation triggered by a grant determination executed based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means in a low probability state, and the result of the grant determination is the first grant corresponding result. In the case where the average duration of the operation period of the game reuse operation is not , the game reuse operation is triggered by a grant determination executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means in a low probability state; It is the same, approximately the same, or less than the average period of operation continuation period of the game repeat operation in the case where the result of the award determination is not the first award corresponding result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the digestibility of the former game repeat operation from being extremely poor compared to the digestibility of the latter game repeat operation. However, in addition to having the above configuration, the game ball is also provided with a configuration in which the frequency with which the triggered ball entry means becomes ready for ball entry when a game ball enters the special ball entry means is constant regardless of the gaming state, as in feature G2. If so, it is assumed that the game is played with the aim of letting the game ball enter the opportunity ball entry means in a low probability state. On the other hand, in a situation where the award determination is made in a low probability state, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, in a low probability state, it is possible to play a game aiming at the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature G4. Features G1 to 3 are characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the opportunity ball entry means are provided in an area where the game ball flows down when a firing operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine described in any one of G3.

According to feature G4, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the game ball enters the triggered ball entry means. It becomes possible to aim for the ball to enter the ball.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined situation is a state in which the special control is executed.

According to feature G5, by transitioning to a state in which special control is executed, not only is it possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but also the game ball can be easily entered into the special ball entry means. The ball can enter the ball. This makes it possible to increase the benefit of transitioning to a state where special control is executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to allow a game ball to enter the special ball entry means when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state in which the special control is executed.

According to feature G6, even if the state shifts to a state where special control is executed, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means unless a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the player expects a predetermined condition to be met in addition to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in a state where the special control is being executed, and the player expects that a predetermined condition will be satisfied in a state where the special control is being executed. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, characterized in that the ease with which a game ball enters the special ball entry means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state.

According to feature G7, the ease of entry of the game ball into the special entry means is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state, so that a game in which the game ball is expected to enter the special entry means. The player expects the occurrence of a situation where it is easy for game balls to enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature G8. The game ball is configured to be able to enter the special ball entry means when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the number of times the special control is executed is different between the special control state and the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature G8, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, the game ball can be entered into the special ball entry means. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the timing of switching states. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the objects that the player should pay attention to when the special control is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the special control is being executed.

In this case, the number of times the variable entry means changes the state is different between the special control state and the predetermined game state. As a result, the ease with which the game ball enters the special ball entry means differs between the special control state and the predetermined game state, and the player who expects the game ball to enter the special ball entry means is It is expected that a special control execution state will occur in which the game ball is likely to enter the ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G9. In the first response state, the game ball that has flown down from the upstream side is placed on top of the ball, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and in the second response state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in the predetermined direction. It has a displacement part (guiding plate part 214) that allows the flow to flow down to the
The special ball entry means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is placed on the displacement part and the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second compatible state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming balls can flow in.

According to feature G9, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball that was placed on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to whether or not the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state while the game ball is placed on the displacement part.

Feature G10. The displacement part is formed such that the game ball resting on the displacement part in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement part,
The special ball entry means is configured to control the special ball entry means when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section. The gaming machine according to feature G9, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming balls can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

According to feature G10, in order for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary not only for the game ball to be placed on the displacement part that is in the first corresponding state, but also for the game ball on which it is placed to occur. The displacement part needs to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball is within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement section and the timing of switching the state of the displacement section, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G11. A means (guide nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the downstream direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature G10, wherein the predetermined range is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to feature G11, the predetermined range, which is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part, is smaller than the specific range that the game ball first reaches in the displacement part. It exists on the forward side in the downward direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement part must change from the first response state to the second response state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement part. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement part, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G12. The target ball entry means, which is either the variable ball entry means or another ball entry means,
A ball entry section into which game balls can enter (first grand prize opening 265, second grand prize opening 266),
A guiding state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed and the game ball placed thereon can be guided to the ball entry section, and a game ball flowing down from the upstream side can be placed in a guiding state. Guiding means (a first guiding plate 271, a second guiding plate 281) provided so as to be switchable to a non-guiding state in which the ball is not guided to the entered ball portion;
Equipped with
When the guiding means is in the guiding state, the special entering ball is placed in a position where a game ball that is placed on the guiding means and has flowed down to a different area different from the ball entering section can enter the ball. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, characterized in that a means is provided.

According to feature G12, when the guiding means is in the guiding state, the game ball placed on the guiding means is guided to either the ball entering section of the target ball entering means or the special ball entering means. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball placed on the guide means, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G13. On the upstream side of the guiding means in the downstream direction of the game ball, there are means (a first guiding nail group 267, a second guiding nail group) for guiding the game ball flowing down the gaming area toward the guiding start range of the guiding means. group 268),
The guiding means is formed such that the game ball placed on the guiding means flows down in a predetermined guiding direction along the guiding means in the guiding state,
The gaming machine according to feature G12, wherein the ball entry portion and the separate area are located on the side of the predetermined guidance direction with respect to the guidance start range.

According to feature G13, both the ball entry section and the separate area that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means are located at a position in the guidance means that is lower than the guidance start range where the game ball first reaches in the guidance means. It exists on the forward side in the downward direction of the game ball. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the way the game ball flows down the guide means.

Feature G14. The gaming machine according to feature G13, characterized in that the separate area exists on the side of the predetermined guidance direction rather than the ball entry portion.

According to feature G14, a game ball that is placed on the guiding means that is in the guiding state but passes through without entering the ball entering section enters the special ball entering means. As a result, the player's sense of disadvantage due to the fact that the game ball that was on the guiding means did not enter the ball entry section is changed into a feeling of benefit when the ball enters the special ball entry means. becomes possible.

Feature G15. As the target ball entering means, a first target ball entering means (first special electric winning device 261) and a second target ball entering means (second special electric winning device 262) are provided,
As the special ball entry means, a first special ball entry means (first through gate 263) and a second special ball entry means (second through gate 264) are provided,
When the first guiding means (first guiding plate 271), which is the guiding means of the first target ball entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball resting on the first guiding means and the first The first special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flown down into a first separate area different from the first ball entry part that is the ball entry part of the target ball entry means can enter the ball,
When the second guiding means (second guiding plate 281), which is the guiding means of the second target ball entering means, is in the guiding state, the game ball that is placed on the second guiding means and the second The second special ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball that has flown down to a second separate area different from the second ball entry part which is the ball entry part of the target ball entry means can enter. The gaming machine according to any one of features G12 to G14.

According to feature G15, there is a combination of the first target ball entering means and the first special ball entering means and a combination of the second target ball entering means and the second special ball entering means. As a result, by varying the types of combinations that are subject to guidance control in the state in which guidance control is executed, the percentage of game balls entering each of the target ball entry means and the special ball entry means can be varied. becomes possible.

Feature G16. The probability that a game ball placed on the first guiding means in the guiding state enters the first special ball entering means, and the probability that the game ball riding on the second guiding means in the guiding state enters the first special ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature G15, wherein the probability of a ball entering the second special ball entry means is different.

According to feature G16, by varying the types of combinations that are the targets of guidance control in the state in which guidance control is executed, it is possible to vary the probability of the game ball entering the special ball entry means. . This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the target of guidance control.

Feature G17. The gaming machine according to feature G15 or G16, wherein the second special ball entry means is provided on the downstream side of the first special ball entry means in the downstream direction of the game ball.

According to feature G17, since the second special ball entry means is provided on the downstream side of the first special ball entry means in the flowing direction of the game ball, the first target ball entry means is the execution target of the special control. In this case, the game ball can not only enter the first special ball entry means, but also the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means. Therefore, the player expects that the first target ball entry means will be the target of guidance control.

Feature G18. The same benefit is provided regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry means or a game ball enters the second special ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G15 to G17.

According to feature G18, the same benefit is granted regardless of whether a game ball enters the first special ball entry means or a game ball enters the second special ball entry means. Regardless of whether the guidance control is performed on either the first target ball entering means or the second target ball entering means, it is possible to suppress the sense of disadvantage felt by the player.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G18, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. In the first response state, the game ball that has flown down from the upstream side is placed on top of the ball, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down in a predetermined direction, and in the second response state, the game ball is prevented from flowing down in the predetermined direction. a displacement part (guiding plate part 214) that allows the flow to flow downward;
When the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed on the displacement part, the game ball flows down in the predetermined direction, thereby causing the inflow of the game ball. Special ball entry means (through gate 35 in the first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments, first special ball entry port 251 and second special ball entry port in the fourteenth embodiment) provided at a position where it is possible to 252, in the fifteenth embodiment, a first through gate 263 and a second through gate 264),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball that was placed on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state when the game ball is placed on the displacement part, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

Feature H2. The displacement part is formed such that the game ball resting on the displacement part in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement part,
The special ball entry means is configured to control the special ball entry means when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming balls can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

According to feature H2, in order for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary not only for the game ball to be placed on the displacement part that is in the first corresponding state, but also for the game ball on which it is placed to occur. The displacement part needs to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball is within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement section and the timing of switching the state of the displacement section, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H3. A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the downstream direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the predetermined range is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to feature H3, the predetermined range that is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part is longer than the specific range that the game ball first reaches in the displacement part. It exists on the forward side in the downward direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement part must change from the first response state to the second response state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement part. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement part, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the predetermined ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) is located on the side in the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

According to feature H4, the predetermined ball entry portion exists on the further side in the downstream direction of the game ball on the displacement portion than the predetermined range that is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement portion. are doing. As a result, the game ball that is placed on the displacement part but does not reach the predetermined ball entry part enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player feels a sense of disadvantage when the game ball that is placed on the displacement part does not enter the prescribed ball entry area, and conversely, a player feels a sense of benefit when the ball enters the special ball entry means. It is possible to change to.

Feature H5. In the predetermined range, when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, a game ball in the next firing order exists at the timing when one game ball reaches the predetermined ball entry part. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the gaming machine is set in a range where

According to feature H5, at the timing when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry portion and the displacement portion switches to the second corresponding state, there is a high possibility that the game ball exists within the predetermined range of the displacement portion. . Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the special ball entering means.

Feature H6. A first special ball entrance means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entrance means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided as the special ball entrance means,
The gaming machine includes means for giving a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
The first special ball entry means changes the displacement part from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) that is a part of the displacement part. 2 is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the compatible state,
The second special ball entry means changes the displacement part from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) that is a part of the displacement part. According to any one of the features H1 to H5, the game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the compatible state. The game machine described.

According to feature H6, when a game ball is placed on the displacement part that is in the first corresponding state, the displacement occurs in a situation where the ball is in a range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball resting on the displacement part.

Feature H7. The displacement part is formed so that the game ball resting on the displacement part in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement part,
It is more advantageous for the player for the game ball to enter the first special ball entry means than for the game ball to enter the second special ball entry means,
A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the downstream direction of the game ball,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the predetermined ball entry portion is located on the side in the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to feature H7, the first predetermined range, which is the range in which the ball can enter the first special ball entry means in the displacement part, is the range in which the ball can enter the second special ball entry means in the displacement part. The predetermined ball entrance part is located further in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part than a certain second predetermined range, and the predetermined ball entry part is located further in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part than the first predetermined range. exists in It is more advantageous for the player if the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. In this case, a game ball that is located closer to the predetermined ball entry part on the displacement part will more easily enter the first special ball entry means that is advantageous to the player, so if the game ball does not reach the predetermined ball entry part It is possible to make the profit for the player higher in a situation where the sense of disadvantage that the game ball does not enter becomes stronger.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement section are set.

According to feature H8, since a plurality of types of operation modes of the displacement portion are set, a plurality of types of predetermined situations exist in which the frequency of ball entry into the special ball entry means is different.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A first state is provided in a game area (game area PA) where a game ball flows down, and a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy for a game ball to enter, and a first state in which a game ball cannot enter or it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Variable ball entry means (in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric winning device 261 and the second Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means (executes special electric opening setting processing and special electric closing setting processing in the main side CPU 63 function) and
A transition means (a function of executing special figure confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) for transitioning the gaming state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
In a predetermined game state other than the special control state, the entry of game balls is restricted, and in the special control state, special ball entry means (first special ball entrance 251 and second special ball entrance 251 and second special entrance entrance 252),
The number of game balls available to the player is increased based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the number of game balls available to the player is increased based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means. means for increasing the number of game balls (a function of executing the processing of step S3902 and step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, the transition of the gaming state to the special control state not only makes it possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but also makes it easier to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means. It is possible to enter the ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the benefit of shifting the gaming state to the special control state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases, and if a game ball enters the special ball entry means, the number of game balls available to the player increases. The number of possible game balls increases. By having the above configuration, when the game state shifts to the special control state, it is not only possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but also the special entry ball It becomes possible to enter the game ball into the means. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the amount of increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player in the special control state, and it becomes possible to increase the advantage in the special control state.

Feature I2. The special ball entry means is on the downstream side of the variable ball entry means in the flowing direction of the game ball in the gaming area, and the variable ball entry means changes from one of the first state and the second state to the other. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position that allows the inflow of game balls at the timing of switching to.

According to feature I2, when the variable ball entry means switches from one of the first state and the second state to the other, game balls that have not entered the variable ball entry means are prevented from entering the special ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, the game balls that were not entered into the variable ball entry means will enter the special ball entry means, and the number of game balls that can be used will increase as the game balls enter the special ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the feeling of disadvantage on the part of the player due to the occurrence of a game ball that has leaked from the target ball of the variable ball entry means.

Feature I3. The variable ball entry means is configured to be in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, and a game ball that has flowed down from an upstream side of the variable ball entry means is placed on the variable ball entry means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in a state of It has a displacement part (guiding plate part 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The special ball entry means causes the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction when the displacement part switches from the first corresponding state to the second compatible state while the game ball is placed on the displacement part. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can enter.

According to feature I3, when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, the game ball that was placed on the displacement section can enter the special ball entry means. As a result, in the special control state, the player not only determines whether or not the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, but also determines whether the displacement part is in the first position when the game ball is placed on the displacement part. Attention should be paid to whether or not the state is switched to the second corresponding state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means.

According to feature I4, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

Feature I5. The displacement part is formed so that the game ball resting on the displacement part in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement part,
The special ball entry means is configured to control the special ball entry means when the displacement section switches from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state in a state where a game ball is placed in a predetermined range that is a part of the displacement section. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming balls can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction.

According to feature I5, in order for a game ball to enter the special ball entry means, it is necessary not only for the game ball to be placed on the displacement part that is in the first corresponding state, but also for the game ball on which it is placed to occur. The displacement part needs to switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state at the perfect timing when the ball is within a predetermined range. As a result, the player pays attention to the relationship between the position of the game ball resting on the displacement section and the switching timing of the state of the displacement section, making it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I6. A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the downstream direction of the game ball,
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the predetermined range is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range.

According to feature I6, the predetermined range that is the range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means on the displacement part is smaller than the specific range that the game ball first reaches on the displacement part. It exists on the forward side in the downward direction of the game ball. As a result, in order for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, the displacement part must change from the first response state to the second response state at the perfect timing while the game ball is flowing down on the displacement part. It is necessary to switch to the state. Therefore, the player pays attention to the movement of the game ball on the displacement part, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I7. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the ball entry portion (entrance portion 45b) of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the predetermined range.

According to feature I7, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

In this case, the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means is located further in the downstream direction of the game ball on the displacement part than the predetermined range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means in the displacement part. Existing. As a result, the game ball that is placed on the displacement part but does not reach the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means enters the special ball entry means. Therefore, the player's sense of disadvantage when the game ball placed on the displacement part does not enter the variable ball entry means is, on the contrary, changed from the player's sense of benefit when the ball enters the special ball entry means. It becomes possible to change.

Feature I8. The predetermined range is the range in which, when game balls are supplied to the specific range at a predetermined firing cycle, the next game ball in the firing order exists at the timing when one game ball reaches the ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature I7, characterized in that the gaming machine is set to .

According to feature I8, there is a possibility that a game ball exists within a predetermined range of the displacement part at the timing when the game ball enters the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means and the displacement part switches to the second corresponding state. becomes higher. Therefore, when the displacement portion changes from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the special ball entering means.

Feature I9. A first special ball entrance means (first special ball entrance 251) and a second special ball entrance means (second special ball entrance 252) are provided as the special ball entrance means,
The gaming machine includes means for giving a first profit when a game ball enters the first special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3902 in the main CPU 63);
means for giving a second profit when a game ball enters the second special ball entry means (a function for executing the process of step S3904 in the main CPU 63);
Equipped with
When a first condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the first special ball entry means,
The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, characterized in that when a second condition is satisfied in the special control state, the game ball can enter the second special ball entry means.

According to feature I9, depending on whether the condition that is satisfied in the special control state is the first condition or the second condition, the special ball entering means that is the ball entering target is the first special ball entering means or the second special ball entering means. There will be a difference between Then, the profits given are different depending on when the game ball enters the first special ball entry means and when the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. As a result, the player not only expects that either the first condition or the second condition will be satisfied in the special control state, but also allows the player to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means with higher profit. It is hoped that the conditions will hold true. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the special control state.

Feature I10. The variable ball entry means is configured to be in a first corresponding state when the variable ball entry means is in one of the first state and the second state, and a game ball that has flowed down from an upstream side of the variable ball entry means is placed on the variable ball entry means. The game ball is prevented from flowing down in a predetermined direction by being in a state of It has a displacement part (guiding plate part 214) that allows the game ball to flow down in the predetermined direction,
The displacement part is formed so that the game ball resting on the displacement part in the first corresponding state flows down in a specific direction along the displacement part,
The first special ball entry means changes the displacement part from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a first predetermined range (first range X1) that is a part of the displacement part. 2 is provided at a position where the game ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the game ball is switched to the compatible state,
The second special ball entry means changes the displacement part from the first corresponding state to the first corresponding state in a state where the game ball is placed in a second predetermined range (second range X2) that is a part of the displacement part. The gaming machine according to feature I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided at a position where the gaming ball can flow in by flowing down in the predetermined direction when the gaming ball is switched to the compatible state.

According to feature I10, when a game ball is placed on the displacement part that is in the first corresponding state, the displacement occurs in a situation where the ball is in a range that allows the ball to enter the special ball entry means with higher profit. Expecting that the part will switch from the first corresponding state to the second corresponding state, attention will be paid to the position of the game ball resting on the displacement part.

Feature I11. The one state is the first state of the variable ball entry means, and the other state is the second state of the variable ball entry means,
It is more advantageous for the player for the game ball to enter the first special ball entry means than for the game ball to enter the second special ball entry means,
A means (guiding nail group 241) for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area toward a specific range of the displacement part is provided on the upstream side of the displacement part in the downstream direction of the game ball,
The second predetermined range exists on the side of the specific direction with respect to the specific range,
The first predetermined range exists on the side in the specific direction with respect to the second predetermined range,
The gaming machine according to feature I10, wherein the ball entry portion of the variable ball entry means is located on the side of the specific direction with respect to the first predetermined range.

According to feature I11, an opportunity for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means occurs at the timing when the variable ball entry means switches from the first state to the second state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention level not only when the variable ball entry means is in the first state but also at the timing when it is switched to the second state.

In this case, the first predetermined range, which is the range in which the ball can enter the first special ball entry means in the displacement part, is the range in which the ball can enter the second special ball entry means, in the displacement part. 2. The ball entry section of the variable ball entry means is located further forward in the downward direction of the game ball on the displacement part than the first predetermined range, and It exists on the side. It is more advantageous for the player if the game ball enters the first special ball entry means than if the game ball enters the second special ball entry means. In this case, a game ball existing on the displacement part near the ball entry part of the variable ball entry means will more easily enter the first special ball entry means, which is advantageous for the player, so the variable ball entry means It is possible to make the profit for the player higher in a situation where the sense of disadvantage that the game ball unfortunately does not enter the ball entry area becomes stronger.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I11, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A first state is provided in a game area (game area PA) where a game ball flows down, and a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy for a game ball to enter, and a first state in which a game ball cannot enter or it is difficult for a game ball to enter. Variable ball entry means (in the first to fourteenth and eighteenth embodiments, the special electric winning device 32, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first special electric winning device 261 and the second Special electric prize winning device 262),
Special control means (executes special electric opening setting processing and special electric closing setting processing in the main side CPU 63 function) and
A transition means (a function of executing special figure confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) for transitioning the gaming state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the special control is executed;
Special ball entry means (first to thirteenth and eighteenth embodiments) that restricts entry of game balls in a predetermined gaming state and allows entry of game balls in a gaming state other than the predetermined gaming state. The through gate 35 in the fourteenth embodiment, the first special ball entrance 251 and the second special ball entrance 252 in the fifteenth embodiment, the first through gate 263 and the second through gate 264 in the fifteenth embodiment,
acquisition compatible ball entry means (sudden gate 311) that allows entry of game balls at least in the predetermined gaming state;
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry means, the game ball enters a state where the game ball can be entered, and based on the game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means, the game ball enters the entry state. A triggering ball entry means (second operating port 34) that allows the ball to enter a state where the ball can enter the ball;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that an opportunity for shifting to the special control state occurs based on a game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means.

According to feature J1, it is possible to enter the ball into the special ball entry means that causes the opportunity ball entry means to enter the ball entry enabled state in a game state that is not a predetermined game state. As a result, a player who expects a game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means will expect a game state other than the predetermined game state to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, even in a predetermined gaming state, the opportunity ball entry means can enter the ball based on the game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means. Then, an opportunity to shift to the special control state occurs based on the fact that the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means that becomes the entry possible state. As a result, the opportunity ball entering means becomes available for ball entry not only in game states that are not predetermined game states but also in predetermined game states, and a special control state occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the opportunity ball entering means. It becomes possible to create a situation where

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the gaming state other than the predetermined gaming state includes the special control state.

According to feature J2, the transition of the gaming state to the special control state not only makes it possible or easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, but also makes it easier to enter the game ball into the special ball entry means. It is possible to enter the ball. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the benefit of shifting the gaming state to the special control state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J3. A regulating means (restriction) for making the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means lower than the probability that a game ball enters the special ball entry means in a game state other than the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, further comprising a nail 312).

According to feature J3, it is possible to suppress the probability that the transition to the special control state will occur based on the entry of a game ball into the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of a game ball into the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature J4. It is provided with a predetermined ball entry means (first operating port 33) that allows the entry of a game ball in at least the predetermined gaming state,
The transition to the special control state is triggered based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
As described in feature J3, the regulating means is configured to make the probability of a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means to be lower than the probability of a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. gaming machines.

According to feature J4, the acquisition compatible ball entry means is preferable to the predetermined ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter in a predetermined gaming state and the occurrence of the game ball entry triggers a transition to a special control state. , the probability of the game ball hitting is lower. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the transition to the special control state based on the entry of a game ball into the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature J5. Notification execution means (main side CPU 63 The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a display control device 82) that executes the process of step S4413 in step S4413.

According to feature J5, it is possible to notify the player through the execution of the acquisition response notification that a game ball has entered the acquisition compatible ball entry means and the triggered ball entry means is in a state where the ball can enter the ball. becomes. As a result, even though the game ball enters the acquisition compatible ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means becomes ready for ball entry, the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means without realizing it. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a phenomenon in which the opportunity to enter the ball disappears.

Feature J6. As described in feature J5, the notification execution means executes the acquisition compatible notification on the condition that a game ball enters the acquisition compatible ball entering means in the predetermined gaming state. gaming machines.

In a game state that is not a predetermined game state, it is possible for the game ball to enter the special ball entry means, so there is a possibility that the player's awareness is directed toward the opportunity ball entry means being in the state where it is possible to enter the ball. Although it is high, in a predetermined game state, the game ball does not enter the special ball entry means, so there is a possibility that the player is not aware that the opportunity ball entry means is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball. In this case, according to feature J6, the acquisition response notification is executed on the condition that a game ball enters the acquisition compatible entering ball means in a predetermined gaming state, so that the triggered ball entering means is in the ball entry possible state. It is possible to direct the player's attention to what will happen. Furthermore, by preventing the acquisition response notification from being executed in a game state other than a predetermined game state in which there is a high possibility that the player's attention is focused on the opportunity ball entry means becoming available for ball entry, It is possible to prevent the execution of response notification from becoming troublesome for the player.

Feature J7. comprising means for acquiring special opportunity information based on the game ball entering the special ball entry means, and acquiring the special opportunity information based on the game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means. ,
The opportunity entry means is configured to enter the ball entry enabled state based on the acquisition of the special opportunity information;
The notification executing means is configured to issue the acquisition response notification on the condition that the special opportunity information is acquired by a game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means in a situation where the special opportunity information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to feature J5 or J6, characterized in that the gaming machine is executed.

According to feature J7, it is possible to execute the acquisition response notification in a situation where the player is less conscious of the fact that the opportunity ball entry means is in the state where the ball entry is possible.

Feature J8. Feature J1 characterized in that the variable ball entry means, the special ball entry means, and the acquisition compatible ball entry means are provided in a region where the game ball flows down when a firing operation is performed in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of J7 to J7.

According to feature J8, by continuing the firing operation in a predetermined manner, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the game ball enters the special ball entry means, and the game ball enters the acquisition compatible ball entry means. It becomes possible to aim for the game ball to enter the ball.

Feature J9. The opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball is easier to reach the opportunity ball entry means when the launch operation is performed in a specific manner than when the launch operation is performed in the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to feature J8.

According to feature J9, when the ball entry means becomes ready for ball entry in a predetermined gaming state, the game ball can be prevented from entering the ball entry means by performing a firing operation in a specific manner. It is possible to make it more likely to occur.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J9, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which they enter a special control state when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, resulting in a winning result in an internal lottery, and A configuration is known in which a special control state is entered based on the arrival of a game ball into a game ball. When the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the gaming area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first state is provided in a game area (game area PA) where a game ball flows down, and a first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy for a game ball to enter, and a first state in which a game ball cannot enter or it is difficult for a game ball to enter. a first variable ball entry means (first special electric prize winning device 291) provided to be switchable between the second state and the second state;
A first state provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means, in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or it is difficult for a game ball to enter. a second variable ball entry means (second special electric prize winning device 292) which is switchably provided for each of the;
A unit control means (FIG. 85(a) in the main CPU 63) that performs control so that a period in which both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are in the first state in the unit control state 85(b));
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, a game ball that fails to enter the first variable ball entry means in the first state in the unit control state can enter the second variable ball entry means in the first state. This makes it easier for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means in the unit control state.

Feature K2. Equipped with a means (a function of executing special figure confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) for shifting the gaming state to a special control state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the unit control state is executed multiple times,
When the unit control state of one execution time ends, the game ball that has started flowing down from the position of the first variable ball entry means toward the second variable ball entry means is in the unit control state of the next execution time. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the ball enters the second variable ball entry means which is in the first state.

According to feature K2, a game ball that cannot enter the first variable ball entry means even though it has reached the position of the first variable ball entry means at the timing when the unit control state ends is The ball enters the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution. This makes it possible to suppress the number of game balls that do not enter the variable ball entry means even though a firing operation is performed with the aim of making the game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature K3. The unit control means controls both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to be in the first state when the unit control state is started. The gaming machine described in K1 or K2.

According to feature K3, by controlling both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to be in the first state when the unit control state is started, these variable ball entry means It is possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the timing of entering the first state is individually set. Moreover, a game ball that fails to enter the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one run can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next run.

Feature K4. The unit control means is configured such that when the unit control state is started, both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are in the first state, and when the unit control state ends, the The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, characterized in that both the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to be in the second state.

According to feature K4, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling each variable ball entry means in the unit control state. In addition, according to this configuration, in the unit control state, the game ball enters the first variable ball entry means basically, but in the unit control state of one execution, the game ball enters the first variable ball entry means. The leaked game ball can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next execution.

Feature K5. Equipped with means (a function of executing special figure confirmation processing in the main side CPU 63) for shifting the gaming state to a special control state in which the unit control state is executed multiple times,
In the special control state, the period from the end of the unit control state of one execution time to the start of the unit control state of the next execution time is from the position of the first variable ball entry means to the second The gaming machine according to feature K3 or K4, characterized in that the time period required for the game ball to reach the position of the variable ball entry means is shorter than the period required for the game ball to reach the position of the variable ball entry means.

According to feature K5, a game ball that has failed to enter the first variable ball entry means in the unit control state of one run can enter the second variable ball entry means in the unit control state of the next run. becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to realize a configuration that makes it difficult for such ball entry leakage to occur by adjusting the positional relationship between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means.

Feature K6. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are configured to allow a game ball flowing down a predetermined game area to enter,
The first variable ball entry means is configured such that when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, a game ball flowing down the predetermined gaming area is guided to the ball entry portion of the first variable ball entry means. , Feature K5 is characterized in that it has a first displacement part (guiding plate part 214 of the first special electric winning device 291) that prevents the game ball from flowing toward the second variable ball entry means. The game machine described.

According to feature K6, when the first variable ball entry means is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from leaking into the first variable ball entry means. In addition, by having the configuration of feature K5 above, even if a ball fails to enter the first variable ball entry means at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution, the game ball will be transferred to the second variable ball entry means. Easy to enter the ball. Therefore, it becomes difficult for balls to leak into the variable ball entry means in the special control state.

Feature K7. When the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, the second variable ball entry means is a game ball that flows down the predetermined gaming area and flows into the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. A second displacement part (second special electric winning device 292 The gaming machine according to feature K6, characterized in that it has a guiding plate portion 214).

According to feature K7, even if a ball fails to enter the first variable ball entry means at the end timing of the unit control state of one execution, the game ball enters the second variable ball entry means. That will happen.

Feature K8. a blocking state provided downstream of the first variable ball entry means and upstream of the second variable ball entry means to prevent game balls flowing down from the upstream side from flowing further downstream; , any of the features K1 to K7 characterized in that the game ball is provided with a blocking means (downward blocking member 303) that is switchable between a non-blocking state that does not block the further flow of the game ball to the downstream side. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature K8, even if a ball leaks into the first variable ball entering means, it is possible to prevent the leaked game ball from flowing into the downstream side by the blocking means. Then, in a situation where the second variable ball entry means is in the first state, the blocking means is switched from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, so that the game balls that are prevented from flowing downstream due to the blocking state are It becomes possible to cause the ball to enter the second variable ball entry means.

Feature K9. The blocking means is set to the blocking state at a timing before the timing at which the first variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the second variable ball entry means is configured to switch from the first state to the second state. and a prevention control means (a function of executing a flow prevention control process in the main CPU 63) for causing the prevention means to enter the non-blocking state at a timing later than the timing at which the state is switched from the state to the first state. The gaming machine according to feature K8.

According to feature K9, the first variable ball entry means is in the blocking state at a timing before the timing at which the first variable ball entry means is switched from the first state to the second state. At the timing of switching from the first state to the second state, it becomes possible to prevent the game ball that has missed the first variable ball entry means from flowing further downstream to the downstream side. Then, the blocking means enters the non-blocking state at a timing later than the timing at which the second variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, so that the game ball blocked by the blocking means is moved to the second variable ball entering state. The ball is entered into the ball entry means. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the ball from entering the variable ball entry means by the blocking means.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K9, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C4, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F45, features G1 to G18, and features H1 to Any one or more of H8, features I1 to I11, features J1 to J9, and features K1 to K9 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature K group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which they enter a special control state when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, resulting in a winning result in an internal lottery, and A configuration is known in which a special control state is entered based on the arrival of a game ball into a game ball. When the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the gaming area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably execute the special control state, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 32... Special electric prize winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 35... Through gate, 45b... Entrance part, 63... Main side CPU, 82... Display control device, 214... Guidance Board part, 241... Guide nail group, 251... First special ball entrance, 252... Second special ball entrance, 261... First special electric winning device, 262... Second special electric winning device, 263... First through gate, 264... 2nd through gate, 265... 1st big winning hole, 266... 2nd big winning hole, 267... 1st guide nail group, 268... 2nd guide nail group, 271... 1st guide board, 281... 2nd Guidance board, 291...First special electric winning device, 292...Second special electric winning device, 303...Flow-down prevention member, 311...Gate for suddenness, 312...Restriction nail, PA...Game area.

Claims (1)

A first state in which a game ball can enter or is easy for a game ball to enter and a second state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult for a game ball to enter is provided in a game area where the game ball flows down. variable ball entry means that are switchably provided for each;
special control means that executes special control to bring the variable ball entry means into the second state after putting it in the first state;
transition means for transitioning a gaming state to a special control state in which the special control is executed;
special ball entry means that restricts entry of game balls in a predetermined gaming state and allows entry of game balls in a gaming state other than the predetermined gaming state;
acquisition compatible ball entry means that enables entry of game balls at least in the predetermined gaming state;
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special ball entry means, the game ball enters a state where the game ball can be entered, and based on the game ball entering the acquisition compatible ball entry means, the game ball enters the entry state. a timing means for entering the ball into a state in which the ball is allowed to enter;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that an opportunity for shifting to the special control state occurs based on a game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means.

Images